import MCC-help .xml files from Calenco

101 files changed, 8496 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/MCC.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/MCC.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cace41a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/MCC.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --><article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="MCC">
+
+  <info>
+    <title>Mageia Control Center</title>
+    <cover>
+	    <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA 3.0 license
+		    <link ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.
+	    </para>
+	    <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.
+	    </para>
+            <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para>
+    </cover>
+  </info>
+
+  
+<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include>
+
+<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</article>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/MageiaUpdate.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..db1ad186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/MageiaUpdate.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="MageiaUpdate">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">Software Packages Update</title>
+
+    <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Software management.</emphasis>¶</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with
+      rpmdrake-edit-media with some media checked as updates. If they are not,
+      you are prompted to do so.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and
+  lists those with an update available in the repositories. They are all
+  selected by default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on
+  the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process. </para>
+
+  <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower
+  half of the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title
+  means you can click to drop down a text. </para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you
+      by displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </inlinemediaobject> . Just click and enter the user password to
+      update the system alike. </para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/XFdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/XFdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ac64ade
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/XFdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">Set up the graphical server</title>
+
+    <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>.
+<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind
+  the capital letters.</para>
+      </footnote></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching
+  server configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for
+  example one with a proprietary driver.</para>
+
+  <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by
+  manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical
+  order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel>
+  Xorg</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while in your Desktop Environment.</para>
+<para> If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - <guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para>
+    </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to use
+  a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for
+  example).</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and
+  you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor
+  isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the
+  <guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and
+  the colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para>
+
+  <para><mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png" />
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>The image of the monitor in the middle gives a preview with
+  the chosen configuration. </para>
+
+  <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for
+  another one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the
+  graphic card and the monitor, it is possible to click on
+  <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to set other resolutions, but bear in mind that
+  you can damage your monitor or select an uncomfortable setting.</para>
+
+  <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change
+  this for another one.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout
+      and restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.
+      </para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before
+  clicking on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if
+  the graphical environment doesn't work.</para>
+
+  <para><note>
+      <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2
+      to open a text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the
+      caps) to to use XFdrake's text version. </para>
+    </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you
+  don't want to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything
+  is right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+<orderedlist><title>Options:</title>
+	<listitem>
+   <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked,
+  it will no longer be possible to restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+  <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable
+  three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+  <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, <emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be unchecked for a server.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+
+  <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system
+  will ask you to confirm.  There is still time to cancel everything and keep the
+  previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect
+  and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para>
+
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--dav.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3c4d59b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--dav.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="diskdrake--dav"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">Access WebDAV shared drives and
+    directories</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by
+    typing <emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root.</para>
+  </footnote> is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Network Sharing
+  tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+ <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a protocol
+    that allows to mount a web server's directory
+    locally, so that it appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the
+    remote machine run a WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to
+    configure the WebDAV server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Creating a new entry</title>
+
+    <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if any, and a
+    <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. Insert
+    the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para>
+
+    <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions.
+    Continue with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking
+    <guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the
+    <guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however
+    correct it, if needed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this
+    mount point.</para>
+
+    <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some
+    other options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton>
+    screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount
+    immediately the access.</para>
+
+    <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button
+    <guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and you
+    new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>,
+    you are asked to save or not the modifications in
+    <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the
+    remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for
+    one-time usage, do not save it.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..66a5a345
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">Share your hard disk
+    partitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1" align="center" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This simple tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> allows you, the administrator, to allow users to
+  share parts of their own /home subdirectories with other users of a same
+  local network which may have computers running either Linux or Windows
+  operating system.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab,
+  labelled "Share your hard disk partitions".</para>
+
+  <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users
+  to share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No
+  sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on
+  <guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on
+  <guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for
+  the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their
+  directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically
+  created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para>
+
+  <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks
+  you choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>.
+  Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on
+  the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both
+  Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any
+  required packages will be installed if necessary.</para>
+
+  <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen.
+  In this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool
+  allows you to add users authorised to share their directories to the
+  fileshare group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare
+  group, then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the
+  fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information
+  about Userdrake, see <link ns2:href="userdrake.xml">this page</link></para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to
+    disconnect and reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken
+    into account.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in
+  his/her file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file
+  managers have this facility.</para>
+
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--nfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a0b01548
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--nfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="en" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">Access NFS shared drives and
+    directories</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare some shared directories to be
+    accessible to all users on the machine. The protocol used for this is NFS
+    which is available on most Linux or Unix systems. The shared directory
+    will be thus available directly at boot. Shared directories can be also
+    accessible directly in a single session for a user with tools such as file
+    browsers.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Procedure</title>
+
+    <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of
+    servers which share directories.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list
+    of the shared directories and select the directory you want to
+    access.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png">
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and
+    you have to specify where to mount the directory.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png">
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also
+    verify and change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton>
+    button. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same
+    button.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>On accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will
+    displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". This
+    will make the directory available at each boot, if the network is
+    accessible. The new directory is then available in your file browser, for
+    example in dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--removable.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3fd36aef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--removable.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="diskdrake--removable" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD/DVD burner</title><subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+     <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance. </para>
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--smb.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2bcff352
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/diskdrake--smb.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="diskdrake--smb"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and
+    directories</title>
+
+    <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle>
+
+  </info>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to declare which shared directories to be
+    accessible to all users on the machine. The protocol used for this is SMB
+    which has been popularized on Windows(R) systems. The shared directory
+    will be available directly at boot. Shared directories can be also
+    accessed directly in a single session by a user with tools such as file
+    browsers.</para>
+
+    <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of
+    available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Procedure</title>
+
+    <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of
+    servers who share directories.</para>
+
+    <para>Click on the server name and on &gt; before the server name to
+    display the list of the shared directories and select the directory you
+    want to access.</para>
+
+    <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available,
+    you have to specify where to mount the directory.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the
+    <guimenu>Mount button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some
+    options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+    <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those
+    able to connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can
+    unmount it with the same button.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message
+    will ask "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will
+    allow directory to made available at each boot, if the network is
+    accessible. The new directory is then available in your file browser, for
+    example in dolphin.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drak3d.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drak3d.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9644c1b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drak3d.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">3D Desktop Effects</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> lets you manage the 3D desktop effects on your operating
+    system. 3D effects are turned off by default.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section annotations="center">
+    <title>Getting Started</title>
+
+    <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If
+    the package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d
+    can start.</para>
+
+    <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window.
+    Here you can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or
+    <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a
+    composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special
+    effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to
+    turn it on.</para>
+
+    <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean
+    installation of Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which
+    packages need to be installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the
+    <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that
+    Compiz Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log
+    back in for the changes to take effect.</para>
+
+    <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure
+    Compiz Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager)
+    tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Troubleshooting</title>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title>
+
+      <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into
+      your desktop but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back
+      to the log in screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select
+      drak3d.</para>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+
+      <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator,
+      you will be prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the
+      administrator login with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes
+      that may have caused the log in problem.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakauth.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakauth.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a1d71e39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakauth.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">Authentication</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="drakauth.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="drakauth-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+  role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the manner in which you can be
+  recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para>
+
+  <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file
+  on your computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you
+  to do so and give information about that.</para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakboot--boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakboot--boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6b64af47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakboot--boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakboot--boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot--boot-ti1">Set up boot system</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot --boot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" align="center" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to configure the boot options (choice of the
+  bootloader, set a password, the default boot, etc.)</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled
+  "Set up boot system".</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing.
+    Changing some settings may prevent your machine from booting again
+    !</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is
+  possible to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub or
+  Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question of taste,
+  there are no other consequences. You can also set the <guibutton>Boot
+  device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you are an expert. The
+  boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any modification can
+  prevent you machine from booting.</para>
+
+  <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can
+  set the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in
+  seconds. During this delay, grub or Lilo will display the list of available
+  operating systems, prompting you to make your choice, if no selection is
+  made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay
+  elapses.</para>
+
+  <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it
+  is possible to set a password.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra
+  options.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for
+  the power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this
+  was the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI
+  compatible.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for
+  multicore processors.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a
+    dual processor and enable SMP.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local
+  APIC:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are
+  two components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O
+  APIC. This one routes the interrupts it receives them from peripheral buses
+  to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful
+  for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC
+  system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message
+  "spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local
+  APIC.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Clean /tmp at each boot:</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>If checked, this option will empty the /tmp directory at each boot,
+  preventing it from become too big and clearing the trackings that don't need
+  to be kept.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen, you can see the list of all
+  the available entries at boot time. The default one is asterisked. To change
+  the order of the menu entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the
+  selected item. If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or
+  <guibutton>Modify </guibutton>buttons, a new window appears to add a new
+  entry in the Grub menu or to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar
+  with Lilo or Grub to be able to use these tools.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you
+  want to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For
+  example: Mageia3.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It
+  matches the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the
+  kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example
+  (hd0,1).</para>
+
+  <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given
+  to the kernel at boot time.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot
+  this entry by default.</para>
+
+  <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is
+  possible to chose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an
+  <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> file and a Network profile in the drop-down
+  lists. (Complements needed)</para>
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakboot --boot</emphasis> as root.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakboot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakboot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..87df8446
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakboot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakboot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">Set up autologin to automatically log
+    in</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakboot-im1" fileref="drakboot.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows you to automatically login the same user, in her/his
+  desktop environment, without asking for any password. It's called autologin.
+  This is generally a good idea when there is only one user like to be using
+  the machine.</para>
+
+  <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the
+  Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log
+  in".</para>
+
+  <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para>
+
+  <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system
+  starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the
+  boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be
+  possible to launch the graphic interface manually.</para>
+
+  <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check
+  either <guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the
+  system to continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check
+  <guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if
+  needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default
+  username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakclock.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakclock.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b40484c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakclock.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakclock">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">Manage date and time</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the tab System in the Mageia Control Center
+  labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and time"</guilabel>. In some desktop
+  environments it is also available by a right click / Adjust date and Time
+  ... on the clock in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para>It's a very simple tool.</para>
+
+  <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On the screenshot above, the date is
+  September (on the upper left), 2012 (on the upper right), the 2nd (in blue)
+  and it is a Sunday. Select the month (or year) by clicking on the little
+  arrows on each side of September (or 2012). Select the day by clicking on
+  its number.</para>
+
+  <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time
+  Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on
+  time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time
+  Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para>
+
+  <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's
+  useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours,
+  minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows
+  to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see
+  your desktop environment settings for that.</para>
+
+  <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on
+  the <guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list
+  the nearest town.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this
+    tool, they will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the
+    localisation settings.</para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconnect--del.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7675568c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconnect--del.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">Remove a connection</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the
+command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> 
+    <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> 
+    <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted successfully.</para> 
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconnect.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconnect.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff460054
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconnect.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,845 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakconnect">
+  <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled &amp; Faudel whilst editing this document.">
+    <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN,
+    ADSL, ...)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure much of local network or Internet
+    access. You have to know some information from your access provider or
+    your network administrator.</para>
+
+    <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which
+    hardware and provider you have.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available.
+        Select the one to configure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a
+        manual IP address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to
+            select if DNS servers are declared by the DHCP server or are
+            manually specified, as explained below. In the last case, the IP
+            address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of the computer
+            can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name
+            <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.
+            The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the
+            option <emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not
+            all DHCP servers have such a function and if you're setting up
+            your PC to get an IP address from a domestic ADSL router, it is
+            unlikely.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP
+                server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify
+                the NIS server</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of
+                clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if
+                the DHCP server requires the client to specify a hostname
+                before receiving an IP address. This option is not dealt by
+                some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all
+            connection configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Manual configuration</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to
+            declare what DNS servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can
+            be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name
+            <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by
+            default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like
+            <emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+            <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS
+            servers are available from your service provider's website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+            domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if
+            your computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is
+            "splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be
+            "boatanchor.net". Unless you specifically need it, it's ok not to
+            define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need this
+            setting.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you
+    think you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+    team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Cable modem connection</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available.
+        Select the one to configure.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a
+        manual IP address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>None</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to
+            provide User name and password.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select
+            if DNS servers are declared by the DHCP server or are manually
+            specified, as explained below. In the last case, the IP address of
+            DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be
+            specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name
+            <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.
+            The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the
+            option <emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not
+            all DHCP servers have such a function and if you're setting up
+            your PC to get an IP address from a domestic ADSL router, it is
+            unlikely.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP
+                server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify
+                the NIS server</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of
+                clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if
+                the DHCP server requires the client to specify a hostname
+                before receiving an IP address. This option is not dealt by
+                some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all
+            connection configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Manual configuration</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare
+            what DNS servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be
+            specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name
+            <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by
+            default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like
+            <emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+            <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS
+            servers are available from your service provider's website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+            domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if
+            your computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is
+            "splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be
+            "boatanchor.net". Unless you specifically need it, it's ok not to
+            define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not need
+            this setting.</para>
+
+            <mediaobject>
+              <imageobject>
+                <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/>
+              </imageobject>
+            </mediaobject>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new DSL connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select
+          one and to configure it.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.
+          Select your provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+          <guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your
+          provider gave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manual TCP/IP configuration</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Access settings</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account Login (user name)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new ISDN connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>External ISDN modem</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and
+          manufacturer. Select your card.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe
+              (DHCP)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries.
+          Select your provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+          <guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your
+          provider gave you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Connection name</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Phone number</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Login ID</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Authentication method</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by
+          automatic or manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and
+          Subnet mask.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are
+          obtained, by automatic or manual method. In the case of manual
+          configuration, you have to put:</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Domain name</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>First and second DNS Server</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to
+              select only if you are sure that your provider is configured to
+              accept it.</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is
+          obtained, by automatic or manual method. In the case of manual
+          configuration, you have to enter the IP address.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an
+        entry for Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure.
+        Use ndiswrapper only if the other configuration methods did not
+        work.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access
+        points that the card has detected.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Operating mode:</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Managed</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>To access to an existing access point (the most
+                  frequent).</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>Ad-Hoc</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>To configure direct connection between
+                  computers.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is
+            configured.</para>
+
+            <variablelist>
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WPA/WPA2</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware
+                  allows it.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+
+              <varlistentry>
+                <term>WEP</term>
+
+                <listitem>
+                  <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption
+                  method.</para>
+                </listitem>
+              </varlistentry>
+            </variablelist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Encryption key</para>
+
+            <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the
+            access point.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP
+        address or a manual IP address.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Automatic IP</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS
+            servers are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified,
+            as explained below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers
+            has to be set. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here.
+            If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name localhost.localdomain is
+            attributed by default. The Hostname can also be provided by the
+            DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP
+            server</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP
+                server)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the DHCP client</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>DHCP timeout</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify
+                the NIS servers</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of
+                clocks)</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if
+                the DHCP server requires the client to specify a hostname
+                before receiving an IP address. This option is not dealt by
+                some DHCP servers.</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common
+            to all connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Manual configuration</para>
+
+        <orderedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS
+            servers. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no
+            HOSTNAME is specified, the name
+            <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by
+            default.</para>
+
+            <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like
+            <emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is
+            <emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS
+            servers are available from your providers website.</para>
+
+            <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search
+            domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first
+            name, before the period.</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+          </listitem>
+        </orderedlist>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title>
+
+    <para><orderedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select
+          one and to configure it.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The PIN number is asked. Keep left if this PIN number is not
+          required.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the
+          option <guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries.
+          Select your provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+          <guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your
+          provider gave.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Provide access settings</para>
+
+          <itemizedlist>
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Access Point Name</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account Login (user name)</para>
+            </listitem>
+
+            <listitem>
+              <para>Account password</para>
+            </listitem>
+          </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you
+    think you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+    team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Manual choice</para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the
+        package <emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select
+        your provider. If it is not listed, select the option
+        <guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider
+        gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para>
+
+        <itemizedlist>
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para>
+          </listitem>
+
+          <listitem>
+            <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para>
+
+            <itemizedlist>
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP/CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Script-based</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>PAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>Terminal-based</para>
+              </listitem>
+
+              <listitem>
+                <para>CHAP</para>
+              </listitem>
+            </itemizedlist>
+          </listitem>
+        </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakconnect-end">
+    <title>Ending the configuration</title>
+
+    <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network
+        Manager</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is
+        <emphasis>Allow access point roaming</emphasis> which give the
+        possibility to switch automatically between access point according to
+        the signal strength.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Metric (10 by default)</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>MTU</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Network Hotplugging</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start
+    immediately or not.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconsole.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconsole.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..75e75e73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakconsole.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakconsole">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">Open a console as administrator</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> gives you access to a console which is directly opened as
+  root. We do not think that you need more information about that.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakdisk.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakdisk.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e2900165
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakdisk.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakdisk">
+  <!--
+ lebarhon 2012-08-30  Added some comments. Imho, the option button needs explanations -->
+
+  <!--marja 2012-09-02 changed title to visible title for this tool in MCC -->
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">Manage disk partitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakdisk or diskdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny error or a cat jumping on your
+    keyboard can lead to losing all data on a partition or even to erasing the
+    entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll see the screen above on top of
+    the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you
+    want to continue.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk
+  you want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your
+  preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions,
+  resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a
+  partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear
+  all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete
+  disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a
+  partition.</para>
+
+  <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you
+  cannot choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the
+  partition must be unmounted first.</para>
+
+  <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para>
+
+  <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have
+  to delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button
+  <guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is
+  selected</para>
+
+  <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be
+  created.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert
+  mode</guibutton></emphasis> gives some extra available actions, like
+  labelling the partition, as can be seen in the screenshot below.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakedm.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakedm.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..00dcea20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakedm.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakedm" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC -->
+
+    <title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">Set up display manager</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa1">Here<footnote>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa3">You can start this tool from the
+      command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as
+      root.</para>
+    </footnote> you can choose which display manager to use to log into your
+  desktop environment. Only the ones available on your system will be
+  shown.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="drakedm-pa2">Most users will only notice that the
+  provided login screens look different. However, there are differences in
+  supported features, too. LXDM is a lightweight display manager, KDM and GDM
+  have more extras.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfirewall.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..28148e12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfirewall.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">Set up your personal firewall</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Security tab in the Mageia Control Center
+  labelled "Set up your personal firewall". it is the same tool in the first
+  tab of "Configure system security, permissions and audit"</para>
+
+  <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming
+  connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the
+  first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection
+  attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box -
+  <guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable
+  the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para>
+
+  <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on
+  <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field
+  <guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these
+  examples :</para>
+
+  <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para>
+
+  <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp
+  protocol</para>
+
+  <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para>
+
+  <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel>
+  is checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file
+    sharing, ...) it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it
+    is even recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the
+    internet.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These
+  feature allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first
+  box <guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the
+  second box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure
+  somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards
+  corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot
+  below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be
+  warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para>
+
+  <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network
+  applet.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to
+  the Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the
+  necessary packages are downloaded.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network
+    &amp; Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f2b1fcf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfloppy-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakfloppy">
+  <info>
+    <title revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti1">DrakFloppy: Creating a
+    Boot Disk</title>
+
+    <abstract>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-it1">
+          <primary>boot disk</primary>
+
+          <secondary>creating</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakfloppy-it2">
+          <primary>applications</primary>
+
+          <secondary>DrakFloppy</secondary>
+        </indexterm><inlinemediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata revision="1" fileref="../drakfloppy-icon.png" width="2cm" format="PNG"></imagedata>
+          </imageobject>
+        </inlinemediaobject>If you did not create a boot disk when you
+      installed your system, this tool allows you to do so. This is also a
+      rescue disk which allows you to perform maintenance tasks on your system
+      in case of failure.</para>
+    </abstract>
+  </info>
+
+  <section condition="basic">
+    <info>
+      <title revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti3">Using DrakFloppy</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa6">If you want to create a
+    <quote>default</quote> boot disk, that is, one that is based on your
+    current kernel, all you have to do is insert a floppy disk in the
+    appropriate floppy drive, select that drive from the
+    <guilabel>Device</guilabel> pull-down list and press the
+    <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. A dialog will pop up and remind you that
+    a diskette must be inserted in the drive. Accept it to create the
+    disk.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa7">If you want to customize
+    your boot disk, you will have to hit the
+    <guibutton>Preferences</guibutton> button and a window will pop up (see
+    <xref linkend="drakfloppy-custom-disk"></xref>).</para>
+
+    <figure floatstyle="normal" xml:id="drakfloppy-custom-disk">
+      <info>
+        <title xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-ti4">Making a Custom Boot Disk</title>
+      </info>
+
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata revision="2" fileref="drakfloppy-custom-disk.png" align="center" width="11.5cm" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-im1"></imagedata>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </figure>
+
+    <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakfloppy-pa8">The window has two
+    sections: one containing check boxes with options for
+    <command>mkinitrd</command>, and another one with the modules
+    <quote>tree</quote>. Select the modules you need to be added to the
+    floppy. In this example, we want to use the <acronym>IDE</acronym> tape
+    module and pre-load it. Use the <guibutton>Remove a module</guibutton>
+    button to remove the currently selected module. When you are done
+    customizing the boot disk press the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button,
+    return to <application>drakfloppy</application>'s window and then proceed
+    as indicated above to create the disk.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfont.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfont.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..04bb7b3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakfont.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakfont">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">Manage, add and remove fonts. Import
+    Windows(TM) fonts</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It allows you to manage the fonts
+  available on the computer. The main screen above shows:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>a preview of the selected font.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>some buttons explained here later.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Get Windows Fonts: <emphasis/></emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows
+  partition. You must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly)
+  able to use the fonts.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Uninstall:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place.
+  Be careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on
+  the documents that use them.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Import:</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The
+  supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the
+  <emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the
+  fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when
+  done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para>
+
+  <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the
+  Drakfont main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakguard.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakguard.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c64386ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakguard.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakguard">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">Parental Controls</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Security tab,
+  labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label,
+  you have to install the drakguard package (not installed by default).</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Presentation</title>
+
+    <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your
+    computer to restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard
+    has three useful capabilities:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It
+        does this by controlling the shorewall firewall built into
+        Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so
+        these users can only execute what you accept them to execute.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through
+        blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of
+        the website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource
+        parental control blocker DansGuardian.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Configuring Parental controls</title>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are
+        formatted in Ext2, Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up
+        offering to configure ACL on your partitions. ACL stands for Access
+        Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel feature that allows access to
+        individual files to be restricted to named users. ACL is built into
+        Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by an option in Ext2,
+        Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this prompt
+        drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will
+        then suggest you reboot.</para>
+      </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked,
+    the parental control is enable and the Block programm tab</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all
+    the websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise,
+    all the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will
+    have their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on
+    the right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the
+    computer are not inconvenienced. Select an user in the left hand side and
+    click on<guibutton> Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user.
+    Select an user in the right hand side and click on<guibutton>
+    Remove</guibutton> to remove him/her from the allowed users.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Time control: </guibutton>If checked, internet access is
+    allowed with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and
+    <guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time
+    window.<guibutton/></para>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title>
+
+      <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on
+      the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Block Programs Tab</title>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use
+      of ACL to restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to
+      the applications you wish to block.</para>
+
+      <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the
+      right hand side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakgw.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakgw.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..372b947c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakgw.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">Share the Internet connection with other local
+    machines</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1"
+                 xml:id="drakgw-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-principles">
+    <title>Principles</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakgw-net.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a computer (3) which has 
+    Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local network (1). You can
+    use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to other workstations
+    (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the gateway must have
+    two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card must be
+    connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to the
+    Internet (2).</para>
+
+    <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to
+    Internet are set up, as documented in <xref
+    linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard">
+    <title>Gateway wizard</title>
+
+    <para>The wizard<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> offers successive steps which are shown below:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it
+          warns about this and asks to stop the network and configure the
+          hardware.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The
+          wizard automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should
+          verify that what is proposed is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard
+          also proposes one, check that this is correct.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP
+          address, mask and domain name. Check that these parameters are
+          compatible with the actual configuration. It is recommended that you
+          accept these values.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes,
+          the wizard will check that <code>bind</code> is installed.
+          Otherwise, you have to specify the address of a DNS server.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes,
+          the wizard will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and
+          offer to configure it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP
+          range.</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If
+          yes, the wizard will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and
+          offer to configure it, with the address of the administrator
+          (admin@mydomain.com), name of the proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom),
+          the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is
+          connected to printers and to share them.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+    <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is
+    active.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-configure">
+    <title>Configure the client</title>
+
+    <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need
+    to specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address
+    automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when
+    connecting to the network. This method is valid whatever operating
+    system the client is using.</para>
+
+    <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in
+    particular specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine
+    acting as the gateway.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakgw-stop">
+    <title>Stop connection sharing</title>
+
+    <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer,
+    launch the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop
+    the sharing.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakhosts.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakhosts.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e4689331
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakhosts.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">Hosts definitions</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed
+  IP-addresses, this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> allows to specify a name to access them more easily. Then you
+  can use that name instead of the IP-address.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a
+  window to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and
+  optionally an alias which can be used in the same way that the name
+  is.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get
+  the same window.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakinvictus.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d459e4bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakinvictus.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draknetcenter.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8c5d6847
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draknetcenter.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetcenter" version="5.0">
+  <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 
+Write some text means i can't do it :(
+What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything.
+-->
+
+  <!-- -->
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">Network Center</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the Network &amp; Internet tab in the Mageia
+  Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks
+    configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless,
+    satellite, etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons
+    appear, depending on the network type, to allow you to look after the
+    network, change its settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't
+    intended to create a network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network
+    interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para>
+
+    <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks,
+    the first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon
+    <inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless networks,
+    not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types, the
+    colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not
+    connected.</para>
+
+    <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the
+    detected networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the
+    <guilabel>Signal strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not
+    (in green), and the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the
+    chosen one and then either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>,
+    <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is
+    possible here to go from a network to another one. If a private network is
+    selected, the Network Settings window (see below) will open and ask you
+    for extra settings ( an encryption key in particular).</para>
+
+    <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Monitor button</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads
+    (toward the PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The
+    same screen is available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon
+    in the system tray -> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para>
+
+    <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo
+    the local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection
+    which gives details about connection status.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic
+      accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Configure button</title>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network
+    creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton>
+    <guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems,
+    manual configuration may give better results.</para>
+
+    <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel>
+    always looks like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is
+    255.255.255.0, and the <guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS
+    servers</guilabel> are available from your providers website.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this
+    will count the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results
+    are visible in the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once
+    enabled, you may have to reconnect to the network.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network
+    Manager:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you
+    think you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+    team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you
+    think you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+    team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Only the item not already seen above are explained.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an
+    access point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected.
+    Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select
+    <emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as
+    the access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption
+    key:</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>If it is a private network, you need to know this settings.</para>
+
+    <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA
+    which uses a passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also
+    called WPA personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is
+    not often used in private networks.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para>
+
+    <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its
+    access point while remaining connected to the network.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you
+    think you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+    team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The Advanced Settings button</title>
+
+    <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you
+    think you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc
+    team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draknetprofile.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6bb648b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draknetprofile.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draknetprofile" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknetprofile-ti1">Manage different network profiles</title><subtitle>draknetprofile</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="draknetprofile-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draknetprofile.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+   <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">draknetprofile</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draknfs.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draknfs.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4c14777b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draknfs.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">Share drives and directories using NFS</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG"
+                 revision="1"  xml:id="draknfs-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Prerequisites</title>
+
+    <para>When the wizard<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> is launched for the first time, it may display the following
+    message:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to
+      install it?</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is
+    displayed.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Main window</title>
+
+    <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step,
+    the list is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a
+    configuration tool.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Modify entry</title>
+
+    <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also
+    launched with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following
+    parameters are available.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Directory</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The
+      <guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to
+      choose it.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Host access</title>
+
+      <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the
+      shared directory.</para>
+
+      <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated
+      name recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP
+      address</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as
+      @group.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the
+      wildcard characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all
+      hosts in the domain cs.foo.edu.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories
+      to all hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either
+      `/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>User ID Mapping</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests
+      from uid/gid 0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user
+      from the client cannot read or write to the files on the server which
+      are created by root on the server itself.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root
+      squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients
+      (no_root_squash).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all
+      uids and gids to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for
+      NFS-exported public FTP directories, news spool directories, etc. The
+      opposite option is no user UID mapping (no_all_squash), which is the
+      default setting.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid
+      and gid of the anonymous account.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>Advanced options</title>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that
+      requests originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).
+      This option is on by default.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or
+      both read and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to
+      disallow any request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made
+      explicit by using this option.</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server
+      from violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any
+      changes made by these requests have been committed to stable storage
+      (e.g. disc drive).</para>
+
+      <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking
+      which can help improve security in some cases, but can decrease
+      reliability. See exports(5) man page for more details.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>So far the list is has at least one entry.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration
+      files.</para>
+    </section>
+
+    <section>
+      <title>NFS Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current
+      configuration files.</para>
+    </section>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakproxy.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakproxy.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4e7710da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakproxy.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="drakproxy"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">Proxy</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="drakproxy.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can
+  use this tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+      role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> to configure it. Your net administrator will give you the
+  information you need. You can also specify some services which can be
+  accessed without the proxy by exception.</para>
+
+  <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer
+  networks, a proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application)
+  that acts as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources
+  from other servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some
+  service, such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available
+  from a different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to
+  simplify and control their complexity.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7a213307
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Configure Media</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections -->
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><important>
+      <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (as
+      known as repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the
+      media sources to be used to install and update packages and
+      applications. (see Add button below).</para>
+    </important><note>
+      <para>Your system is running under an architecture than may be 32-bit
+      called i586, or 64-bit called x86_64. Take care to choose repositories
+      that suit your system or are not dependent of the architecture, these
+      are called noarch packages.</para>
+    </note></para>
+
+  <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote></para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious
+    with some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system
+    unusable.</para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be
+    enabled. Only media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For
+    security reasons, this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open
+    a console as root and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media
+    --expert.</emphasis></para>
+
+    <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead>
+
+    <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final
+    release versions contain at least:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most
+        programs available supported by Mageia.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some
+        programs which are not free</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which
+        there might be patent claims in some countries.</para>
+
+        <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the
+        day the this version of Mageia was released.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated
+        since release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have
+        this medium enabled, even with a very slow internet connection.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new
+        versions backported from Cauldron (the next version under
+        development).</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for
+        temporary tests of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA
+        team to validate the corrections.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the
+    right</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise
+    to remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example)
+    since all the packages it contains are in the official Core release
+    medium.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader
+    and proxy).</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Add the official repositories available on the internet. These
+    repositories contains only sure and well tested software. Clicking on the
+    add button opens a pop up window giving the choices of installing the
+    "Update sources only" or the "Full set of sources". The first choice the
+    essential, the second is more useful.</para>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para>
+
+    <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads
+    the list in the displayed order and will install the first found package
+    (for a same release number, if not, the last release will be installed).
+    So if possible, place the fastest repositories on the top.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to
+    update and click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example
+    it's too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select
+    all the actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take
+    them out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media
+    mirror</guimenu>, choose between update only or the full set (if you do
+    not know, choose the <guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and
+    accept the contact by clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window
+    opens:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one
+    very close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the
+    available mirrors in that country. Select one and click on
+    <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for
+    example) that isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart name that well define
+    the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to the medium
+    type)</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed"
+    (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to
+    define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand
+    -by default-, update only, always or never).</para>
+
+    <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to
+    authenticate the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or
+    disallow a key. In the window that appear, select a medium and then click
+    on <guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and
+    click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para>
+
+    <para><warning>
+        <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para>
+      </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para>
+
+    <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can
+    configure it here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy
+    hostname</guibutton> and if necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and
+    <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakrpm-update.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakrpm-update.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dc86f8f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakrpm-update.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakrpm-update" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakrpm-update-ti1">Software Packages Update (OLD)</title><subtitle>drakrpm-update</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  
+
+    <para>DON'T USE THIS FILE, USE MageiaUpdate.xml INSTEAD!</para> 
+
+  
+    
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draksambashare.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksambashare.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f021531f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksambashare.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="draksambashare"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with
+    Samba</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="draksambashare-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share
+    some resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to
+    configure the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This
+    protocol is also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can
+    access the resources of the Samba server.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Preparation</title>
+
+    <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a
+    fixed IP address. This can be specified directly on the server, for
+    example with <xref linkend="draknetcenter-ti1"/></para>
+
+    <para>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the station with its
+    MAC-address and give it always the same address. The firewall has also to
+    allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title>
+
+    <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by
+        typing<emphasis role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> checks if needed packages are installed and proposes to
+    install them if they are not yet present. Then the wizard to configure
+    the Samba server is launched.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare0.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare0-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already selected.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare1.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same
+    for the access to the shared resources.</para>
+
+    <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the
+    server on the network.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare2.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Choose the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to
+        access the resource</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself
+        separately for each share</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources,
+    with IP addess or host name.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be
+    described in the Windows workstations.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare4.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the
+    next step.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare5.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept
+    the configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in
+    <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare6.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im6"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller" option is selected, the
+    wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or not and to provide
+    admin users names. The following steps are then the same as for standalone
+    server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing
+        all user and group accounts in a central, shared, account repository.
+        The centralized account repository is shared between (security)
+        controllers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Declare a directory to share</title>
+
+    <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center" fileref="draksambashare15.png" format="PNG"
+                   revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare-im7"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the
+    <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as
+    whether the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable.
+    The share name can not be modified.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="draksambashare16.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="draksambashare-im8"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Menu entries</title>
+
+    <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be
+    used.</para>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>File|Write conf</title>
+
+      <para>Save the current configuration in
+      <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Configure</title>
+
+      <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba server|Restart</title>
+
+      <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration
+      files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+
+    <formalpara>
+      <title>Samba Server|Reload</title>
+
+      <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current
+      configuration files.</para>
+    </formalpara>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Printers share</title>
+
+    <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Samba users</title>
+
+    <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared
+    resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref
+    linkend="userdrake-ti1"/><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draksec.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksec.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4c37ce51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksec.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="draksec">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Configure authentication for Mageia
+    tools</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksec</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish
+  tasks usually done by the administrator.</para>
+
+  <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed
+  in the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool,
+  a drop down list gives the choice between:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any
+      password.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool
+      launching.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para>Root password: the root password is asked before the tool
+      launching</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para>The default values depend of the chosen security level. See in the
+  same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and
+  audit".</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksnapshot-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6fdf1c21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksnapshot-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">Snapshots</title><subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>If you see the screen above when starting this tool, please close it. This crash has been reported many times. </para>
+
+  <para>You can read more about the problem in this bug report: <link xlink:href="https://bugs.mageia.org/show_bug.cgi?id=3032">bug 3032</link></para>
+
+  
+    <para>We shall replace the screenshot with a correct one of the tool, and fill this page with instructions about how to use it, when the bug is fixed.</para> 
+    <!--  <para>Write some text.</para> 
+    <para>Write some text.</para> -->
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">draksnapshot-config</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/draksound.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksound.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0ea5929f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/draksound.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">Sound Configuration</title>
+
+    <subtitle>draksound</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.¶</para>
+
+  <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, including the driver
+  choice, PulseAudio options and trouble shooting. It will help you if you
+  experience sound problems or if you change the sound card.</para>
+
+  <para>The drop down list called <guilabel>Driver</guilabel> allows you to
+  select a driver from all the ones available on the computer that match the
+  sound card.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Most of the time, it is possible to choose a driver using the OSS or
+    ALSA API. OSS is the oldest and very basic, we recommend to choose ALSA
+    when possible for its enhanced features.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the
+  sound inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the
+  resulting sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video ->
+  PulseAudio volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para>
+
+  <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave
+  it enabled.</para>
+
+  <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some
+  programs. It is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para>
+
+  <para>The button <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> display a new windows with
+  three buttons :</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="Draksound1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first button gives total freedom of choice. You have to know what
+  you are doing.</para>
+
+  <para>The second one is obvious and the last one gives assistance with
+  fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this
+  before asking the community for help.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakups.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakups.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..279b4158
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakups.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">Set up a UPS for power monitoring</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakvpn.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakvpn.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f4379837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakvpn.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakvpn">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network
+    access</title>
+
+    <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows to configure secure access to a remote network
+    establishing a tunnel between the local workstation and the remote
+    network. We discuss here only of the configuration on the workstation
+    side. We assume that the remote network is already in operation, and that
+    you have the connection information from the network administrator, like a
+    .pcf configuration file .</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Configuration</title>
+
+    <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on
+    which protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para>
+
+    <para>Then give your connection a name.</para>
+
+    <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN
+    connection.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For Cisco VPN</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para><mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject></para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be
+        installed the first time the tools is used.</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject>Select the files that you received from the network
+        administrator.</para>
+
+        <para>Advanced parameters:</para>
+
+        <mediaobject>
+          <imageobject>
+            <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/>
+          </imageobject>
+        </mediaobject>
+
+        <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN
+    connection.</para>
+
+    <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network
+    connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always
+    connect to this VPN.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_apache2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f68d40f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_apache2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_bind.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..35660053
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_bind.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">Configure DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be4d1ec5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">Configure DHCP</title><subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_ntp.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..50c92e69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_ntp.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">Configure time</title><subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a9e52b5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">Configure FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_squid.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff867bd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_squid.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">Configure proxy</title><subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_sshd.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..67635991
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakwizard_sshd.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">OpenSSH daemon configuration</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..28460997
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-MNF-chapter.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,820 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<chapter xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakx-MNF" ><info><title xml:id="drakx-title">Installation with DrakX</title></info>
+  
+
+  
+
+
+  <section><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti1">Deprecated - Introduction to the MandrakeSecurity
+    Installer</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa1"> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it31">
+    <primary>DrakX</primary> </indexterm> <application>DrakX</application> is
+    <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>'s installation program.  Its ease of use
+    has been enhanced with a graphical user interface, allowing you to
+    move forward and backward through the installation and prompting
+    you when required.  With <application>DrakX</application>, it doesn't matter whether
+    you're a new user to <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> or an old pro –
+    <application>DrakX</application>'s job is to give you a smooth installation and an
+    easy transition into <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>.</para>
+
+
+    <figure xml:id="dx-welcome"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti2">Very First Installation Welcome Screen</title></info>
+      
+      <mediaobject>
+	<imageobject>
+	  <imagedata align="center" fileref="../dx-MNF-welcome.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+	</imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </figure>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa2" revision="2">When you begin, the first screen
+    that comes up will present some information and give you
+    installation options. (<xref linkend="dx-welcome"/>). Doing
+    nothing will simply begin the installation in normal or
+    <quote>linux</quote> mode.  The next few paragraphs will go over
+    some options and parameters that you can pass to the install
+    program if you run into problems.</para>
+
+    <para condition="expert" xml:id="drakx-pa3a" revision="2">Pressing
+<keycap>F1</keycap> will open a help screen. Here are some useful
+options to choose from:</para>
+
+
+    <itemizedlist condition="expert" xml:id="dx-help-options" revision="1">
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa3" revision="2"><literal>vgalo</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it32"> <primary>installation
+       options</primary><secondary>vgalo</secondary> </indexterm>if
+       you tried a default installation and did not see the graphical
+       interface as shown below in <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>, you can try to run the
+       installation in low resolution mode. This happens with certain
+       types of graphics cards, so with <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> we
+       give you a number of options to work around problems with older
+       hardware.  To try the installation in low resolution mode, type
+       <userinput>vgalo</userinput> at the prompt.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa4"><literal>text</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it33"> <primary>installation
+        options</primary><secondary>text</secondary> </indexterm>if
+        your video card is very old and graphical installation does
+        not work at all, you can always choose the text mode
+        installation.  Because all video cards can display text, this
+        is the <quote>installation of last resort</quote>. Don't worry
+        though – it's not likely that you'll need to use the
+        text install.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+       <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa5" revision="1"><literal>expert</literal>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it34"> <primary>installation
+       options</primary><secondary>expert</secondary>
+       </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it35"><primary>installation
+       options </primary><secondary>linux</secondary></indexterm>in
+       some rare cases, your PC may appear to freeze or lock-up during
+       the hardware detection phase.  If that happens, then adding the
+       word <literal>expert</literal> as a parameter will tell the
+       install program to bypass hardware detection.  Because
+       <application>DrakX</application> will not scan for hardware, you will need to
+       manually specify hardware parameters later in the installation.
+       The <literal>expert</literal> parameter can be added to the
+       previous modes, so you may end up specifying 
+
+<screen xml:id="drakx-scRK">boot: vgalo expert</screen> 
+
+to perform a low resolution graphical install without <application>DrakX</application>
+       performing a hardware scan.</para>
+    <note>
+     <para xml:id="drakx-pa5a">Selecting the <literal>expert</literal>
+      mode will ask you for more details about the installation
+      process, letting you perform a more customized
+      installation.</para>
+    </note>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa6"><literal>kernel options</literal>:
+       <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it36"><primary>installation
+       options</primary><secondary>kernel
+       options</secondary></indexterm>Kernel options usually aren't
+       required for most machines.  There are a few cases of
+       motherboards incorrectly reporting the amount of memory
+       installed due to bugs in the design or in the BIOS.  If you
+       need to manually specify the amount of DRAM installed in your
+       PC, use the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it37">
+       <primary>commands</primary> <secondary>mem= xxxM</secondary>
+       </indexterm> <command>mem= xxxM</command> parameter. For
+       example, to start the installation in normal mode with a
+       computer having 256 <acronym>MB</acronym> of memory, your command line
+       would look like this:
+
+<screen xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-sc1">boot: linux mem=256M</screen></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa7" revision="1">Now that we've gone over what
+    <emphasis>might</emphasis> go wrong, let's move on to the actual
+    installation process.  When the installer starts, you'll see a
+    nice graphical interface ( <xref linkend="selectLanguage-fig"/>
+    ). On the left will be the various installation steps. Depending
+    on the installation's progress level, some stages may or may not
+    be available.  If a particular stage is available it will be
+    highlighted when you move the mouse pointer over it.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa8">The colors of the buttons on the left side of
+    the screen let you quickly see what's going on with the
+    installation:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa9">red: this installation phase has not yet been
+            carried out</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa10">orange: the installation stage that
+            is currently being processed</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa11">green: this installation stage has
+        already been configured. However, nothing stops you from going
+        back to a stage that has already been completed if you need to
+        reconfigure something.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa12" revision="1">This guide assumes that you
+are performing a standard, step-by-step installation, as described
+below.</para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-selectLanguage"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti3">Choosing Your Language</title></info>    
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa13">The first step is to choose your preferred
+    language.</para>
+
+    <figure xml:id="selectLanguage-fig" revision="2"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti4">Choosing the Default Language</title></info>
+      
+      <mediaobject>
+	<imageobject>
+	  <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im2" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+	</imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </figure>    
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa14"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it38"><primary>language</primary></indexterm> Your
+    choice of preferred language will affect the language of the
+    documentation, the installer and the system in general.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa15">Clicking on the
+    <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button will allow you to select
+    other languages to be installed on your workstation, thereby
+    installing the language-specific files for system documentation
+    and applications. For example, if you will host users from Spain
+    on your machine, select English as the default language in the
+    tree view and <guilabel>Spanish|Spain</guilabel> in the Advanced
+    section.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa16">Note that you're not limited to choosing a
+    single additional language. Once you have selected additional
+    locales, click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to
+    continue.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="drakx-pa18a" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it8a">
+	  <primary>language</primary> <secondary>setting</secondary>
+	  </indexterm>Not all languages listed here are supported in
+	  the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface.</para>
+    </note>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-acceptLicense"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti5">License Terms of the Distribution</title></info>    
+    
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-license.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im3" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa17"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it39"><primary>license</primary></indexterm>Before
+    continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the license. It
+    covers the entire <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> distribution, and if you
+    do not agree with all the terms in it you should click on the
+    <guibutton>Refuse </guibutton> button.  This will immediately
+    terminate the installation.  Clicking on the
+    <guibutton>Accept</guibutton> button will continue the
+    installation.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
+  
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-setupSCSI"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti6">Disk Detection and Configuration</title></info>
+    
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setupSCSI.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im4" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa18"><application>DrakX</application> will first detect any
+    <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it40"><primary>IDE</primary><secondary>detection
+    </secondary> </indexterm> IDE devices present in your computer. It
+    will also scan for one or more <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it41"><primary>PCI SCSI</primary>
+    </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it42"><primary>SCSI</primary></indexterm> PCI SCSI
+    cards on your system. If a SCSI card is found, <application>DrakX</application> will
+    automatically install the appropriate driver.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa19">Because hardware detection is not foolproof,
+    <application>DrakX</application> will ask you if you have a PCI SCSI
+    installed. Clicking <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> will display a
+    list of SCSI cards to choose from. Click <guibutton>No</guibutton>
+    if you know that you have no SCSI hardware in your machine. If
+    you're not sure, you can check the list of hardware detected in
+    your machine by selecting <guilabel>See hardware info </guilabel>
+    and clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Examine the list of
+    hardware and then click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to
+    return to the SCSI interface question.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa20">If you had to manually specify your PCI SCSI
+    adapter, <application>DrakX</application> will ask if you want to configure options
+    for it. You should allow <application>DrakX</application> to probe the hardware for
+    the card-specific options which are needed to initialize the
+    adapter. Most of the time, <application>DrakX</application> will get through this step
+    without any issues.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa21" revision="1">If <application>DrakX</application> is not able to
+    probe for the options to automatically determine which parameters
+    need to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually
+    configure the driver.</para>
+
+    <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it43">
+      <primary>hard disk</primary>
+      <secondary>detection</secondary>
+    </indexterm>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectMouse"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti7">Configuring your Mouse</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectMouse.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im5" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa22" revision="11"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it44"><primary>mouse</primary> </indexterm>
+      Usually, <application>DrakX</application> has no problems detecting the number of
+      buttons on your mouse. If it does, it assumes you have a
+      two-button mouse and will configure it for third-button
+      emulation. The third-button mouse button of a two-button mouse
+      can be <quote>pressed </quote> by simultaneously clicking the
+      left and right mouse buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically
+      know whether your mouse uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</acronym>
+      interface.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa23">If for some reason you wish to specify a
+    different type of mouse, select it from the provided list.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa24" revision="10">If you choose a mouse other
+    than the default, a test screen will be displayed. Use the buttons
+    and wheel to verify that the settings are correct and that the
+    mouse is working correctly. If the mouse is not working well,
+    press the space bar or <keycap> Return</keycap> key to
+    <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> the test and to go back to the list
+    of choices.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa25" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it45"><primary>mouse</primary>
+	  <secondary>wheel</secondary> </indexterm>Wheel mice are
+	  occasionally not detected automatically, so you will need to
+	  select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one
+	  corresponding to the port that your mouse is attached to.
+	  After selecting a mouse and pressing the
+	  <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, a mouse image is displayed
+	  on-screen. Scroll the mouse wheel to ensure that it is
+	  activated correctly. Once you see the on-screen scroll wheel
+	  moving as you scroll your mouse wheel, test the buttons and
+	  check that the mouse pointer moves on-screen as you move
+	  your mouse.</para>
+    </note>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectKeyboard"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti8">Configuring the Keyboard</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-selectKeyboard.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im6" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa26" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it46">
+      <primary>keyboard</primary></indexterm>Depending on the default
+      language you chose in <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>,
+      <application>DrakX</application> will automatically select a particular type of
+      keyboard configuration. However, you might not have a keyboard
+      that corresponds exactly to your language: for example, if you
+      are an English speaking Swiss person, you may have a Swiss
+      keyboard. Or if you speak English but are located in Québec, you
+      may find yourself in the same situation where your native
+      language and keyboard do not match. In either case, this
+      installation step will allow you to select an appropriate
+      keyboard from a list.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa27">Click on the <guibutton revision="1">More</guibutton> button to be presented with the
+    complete list of supported keyboards.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-doPartitionDisks"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti9">Selecting the Mount Points</title></info>
+    
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-doPartitionDisks.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im7" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa28"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it47"><primary>mount
+   points</primary></indexterm>At this point, you need to decide where
+   you want to install the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> operating system on
+   your hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an existing
+   operating system is using all the available space you will have to
+   partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive consists
+   of logically dividing it to create the space needed to install your
+   new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa29" revision="2">Because the process of
+    partitioning a hard drive is usually irreversible and can lead to
+    lost data if there is an existing operating system already
+    installed on the drive, partitioning can be intimidating and
+    stressful if you are an inexperienced user. Fortunately,
+    <application>DrakX</application> includes a wizard which simplifies this
+    process. Before continuing with this step, read through the rest
+    of this section and above all, take your time.</para>
+
+    <para condition="expert" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa30" revision="5"/>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa31">If your hard drive has already been
+    partitioned, either from a previous installation of <application>GNU/Linux</application> or
+    by another partitioning tool, select the appropriate partitions
+    that you want to install your Linux system into.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa32">If partitions haven't been configured, you
+    will need to create them using the wizard. Depending on your hard
+    drive configuration, several options are available:<itemizedlist revision="2">
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa33"><guibutton>Use free space</guibutton>:
+          this option will perform an automatic partitioning of your
+          blank drive(s).  If you use this option there will be no
+          further prompts.  </para></listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa34" revision="1"><guibutton>Use existing
+      partition</guibutton>: the wizard has detected one or more
+      existing Linux partitions on your hard drive. If you want to use
+      them, choose this option. You will then be asked to choose the
+      mount points associated with each of the partitions. The legacy
+      mount points are selected by default, and for the most part it's
+      a good idea to keep them.</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa35" revision="12"><guibutton>Use the
+      free space on the Windows partition</guibutton>: if
+      <application>Microsoft</application><superscript>®</superscript>
+      <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application><superscript>©</superscript> is installed on
+      your hard drive and takes all the space available on it, you
+      have to create free space for Linux data. To do so, you can
+      delete your <application>Microsoft</application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and data
+      (see <quote> Erase entire disk</quote> or <quote>Expert
+      mode</quote> solutions) or resize your <application>Microsoft</application>
+      <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> FAT partition. Resizing can be performed without
+      the loss of any data, <emphasis>provided you previously
+      defragment the <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and that it uses the FAT
+      format. Backing up your data is strongly
+      recommended.</emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you
+      want to use both <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> and <application>Microsoft</application>
+      <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same computer.</para>
+
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa36">Before choosing this option, please
+          understand that after this procedure, the size of your
+          <application>Microsoft</application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition will be smaller
+          then when you started. You will have less free space under
+          <application>Microsoft</application> <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> to store your data or to
+          install new software.</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa37"><guibutton>Erase entire
+          disk</guibutton>: if you want to delete all data and all
+          partitions present on your hard drive and replace them with
+          your new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> system, choose this
+          option. Be careful, because you will not be able to undo
+          your choice after you confirm.</para>
+	  <warning>
+	    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa38">If you choose this option,
+      <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will be deleted.
+      </para></warning>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa39"><guibutton>Remove Windows</guibutton>:
+      this will simply erase everything on the drive and begin fresh,
+      partitioning everything from scratch. <emphasis>All</emphasis>
+      data on your disk will be lost.</para>
+	  <warning>
+	    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa40">If you choose this option,
+      <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will be lost.</para>
+	  </warning>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa41" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it48"><primary>partitions</primary>
+	      <secondary>manual formatting</secondary></indexterm>
+	      <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it49">
+	      <primary>partitioning</primary> </indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it50"><primary>DiskDrake</primary></indexterm>
+	      <guibutton>Custom disk partitioning</guibutton>: choose
+	      this option if you want to manually partition your hard
+	      drive. Be careful –– it is a powerful
+	      but dangerous choice and you can very easily lose all
+	      your data. That's why this option is really only
+	      recommended if you have done something like this before
+	      and have some experience. For more instructions on how
+	      to use the <application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to the <link xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xlink:href="http://www.mandrakelinux.com/en/doc/82/en/user.html/diskdrake.html">online
+	      documentation for
+	      <application>DiskDrake</application></link>.</para></listitem>
+	      </itemizedlist></para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-formatPartitions"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti10">Choose Partitions to Be Formatted</title></info>
+    
+
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im8" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa42"> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it51"><primary>partitions</primary>
+	<secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>Any partitions
+	that have been newly defined must be formatted for use
+	(formatting means creating a file system).</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa43">At this time, you may wish to reformat some
+already existing partitions to erase any data they contain. If you
+wish to do that, please select those partitions as well.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa44">Please note that it is not necessary to
+   reformat all <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it52"><primary>partitions</primary>
+   <secondary>pre-existing</secondary></indexterm>pre-existing
+   partitions. You must reformat the partitions containing the
+   operating system (such as <literal>/</literal>,
+   <literal>/usr</literal> or <literal>/var</literal>) but you do not
+   have to reformat partitions containing data that you wish to keep
+   (typically <literal>/home</literal>).</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa45">Please be careful when selecting
+   partitions. After formatting, all data on the selected partitions
+   will be deleted and you will not be able to recover it.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa46">Click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when you
+    are ready to format partitions.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa47">Click on <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> if
+you want to choose another partition for your new <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>
+operating system installation.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa48">Click on <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if
+   you wish to select partitions that will be checked for <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it53"><primary>partitions</primary><secondary>bad
+   blocks</secondary></indexterm>bad blocks on the disk.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-installPackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti11">Actual Packages Installation</title></info>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa49" revision="2">Then comes the actual system
+    installation. The packages list is predefined and cannot be
+    changed at this time. The time required to complete the
+    installation depends on the speed of your hardware. An estimate of
+    the remaining time-to-go will be displayed on-screen to help gauge
+    if there is sufficient time to enjoy a cup of coffee.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti12">Root Password</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setRootPassword.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im9" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa50">This is the most crucial decision point for
+   the security of your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you have to enter the
+   <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it54"><primary>root</primary>
+   <secondary>password</secondary></indexterm> <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it55"><primary>password</primary>
+   <secondary>root</secondary></indexterm> <literal>root</literal>
+   password. <literal>Root</literal> is the system administrator and
+   is the only one authorized to make updates, add users, change the
+   overall system configuration, and so on. In short,
+   <literal>root</literal> can do everything! That is why you must
+   choose a password that is difficult to guess – <application>DrakX</application>
+   will tell you if the password that you chose is too easy. As you can
+   see, you are not forced to enter a password, but we strongly advise
+   you against.  <application>GNU/Linux</application> is as prone to operator error as any other
+   operating system.  Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all
+   limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by
+   carelessly accessing the partitions themselves, it is important
+   that it be difficult to become <literal>root</literal>.</para>
+    
+    <note>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa51" revision="1">The <application>msec</application> security
+   level is set to <literal>4</literal> (<quote>high</quote>) by
+   default. The password should be a mixture of alphanumeric
+   characters and must be at least 8 characters long. Never write down
+   the <literal>root</literal> password –– it makes
+   it too easy to compromise a system.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa52">One caveat –– do not make
+   the password too long or complicated because you must be able to
+   remember it!</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa53">The password will not be displayed on screen
+    as you type it in. To reduce the chance of a blind typing error
+    you will need to enter the password twice. If you do happen to
+    make the same typing error twice, this <quote>incorrect</quote>
+    password will have to be used the first time you connect.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-setAdminPassword"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti13">Administrator Password</title></info>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa54">You are then asked to enter the password
+    for the system administrator (login: <literal>admin</literal>). It
+    is differentiated from the <literal>root</literal> user, for security reasons,
+    and also because it may not be the same person. It is that
+    <literal>admin</literal> account that will be required to access
+    the <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface. The criterion for
+    choosing this password are the same as for the <literal>root</literal>
+    password.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-addUser"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti14">Adding a User</title></info>
+    
+    
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-addUser.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im10" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa55" revision="2">All necessary users have
+    already been added, and you shouldn't need adding more users for
+    normal <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> operations. However, if you plan to
+    use the <application>squid</application> <acronym>PAM</acronym>
+    authentication feature, you can add here the users that will be
+    authorized.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa56">The first field asks you for a real name. Of
+    course, this is not mandatory –– you can actually
+    enter whatever you like. <application>DrakX</application> will use the first word you
+    typed in and copy it to the <guimenu>User name</guimenu> field,
+    which is the name this user will enter to log onto the system. If
+    you like, you may override the default and change the
+    username. The next step is to enter a password. From a security
+    point of view, a non-privileged (regular) user password is not as
+    crucial as the <literal>root</literal> password, but that is no
+    reason to neglect it by making it blank or too simple: after all,
+    <emphasis>your</emphasis> files could be the ones at risk.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa57" revision="2">You can then choose to make
+    that user member of one or more special groups that will give him
+    special priviledges. Check the button for the priviledges you want
+    for that user.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa58" revision="1">Once you click on
+    <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu>, you can add additional
+    users. Select <guimenu>Done</guimenu> when you have finished
+    adding users.</para>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa59">Clicking the
+<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the
+default <literal>shell</literal> for that user
+(<application>bash</application> by default).</para>
+    </tip>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-configureNetwork"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti15">Configure your Local Network</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-configureNetwork.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im11" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa60" revision="1">You will now set up your local
+    network connection (<acronym>LAN</acronym>).
+    <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> will attempt to autodetect network devices
+    and modems. If this detection fails, uncheck the <guilabel>Use
+    auto detection</guilabel> box.</para>
+
+    <warning>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa61" revision="1">Even though many connection
+types are offered here, do not configure your Internet connection
+now. You should now limit yourself to configuring the
+<literal>Ethernet</literal> <acronym>LAN</acronym> access, so that you
+can later connect to the administration interface and configure other
+connections easily through it.</para>
+    </warning>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa62">We will not detail each configuration
+    option –  just make sure that you have all the
+    parameters, such as IP address, default gateway, DNS servers,
+    etc. from your Internet Service Provider or system
+    administrator.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa63" revision="1">You will be able to
+    configure all your other network interfaces (Internet,
+    <acronym>DMZ</acronym>, etc.) later on through
+    <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> interface.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
+  
+
+  <section condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti16">Where Should You Place the Bootloader</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+    <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-setupBootloaderBeginner.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im12" width="11.5cm"/>
+  </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa64">You must indicate where you wish to place the
+    information the bootloader requires to boot to <application>GNU/Linux</application>.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa65">Unless you know exactly what you are doing,
+    choose <guibutton>First sector of drive (MBR)</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa66" revision="1">You are then presented the
+    different boot entries that will be proposed at system boot. You
+    can modify them here.</para>
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-createBootdisk"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti17">Boot Disk</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-createBootdisk.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im13" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa67">The <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> has a
+    built-in rescue mode. You can access it by booting the <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>,
+    pressing the <userinput>F1</userinput> key at boot and typing
+    <userinput>rescue</userinput> at the prompt.  If your computer
+    cannot boot from the <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>, there are at least two situations
+    where having a boot floppy is critical:
+    <itemizedlist>
+	<listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa68" revision="1">when installing the
+        <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it56"><primary>bootloader</primary>
+        </indexterm>bootloader, <application>DrakX</application> will rewrite the boot
+        sector (<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it57">
+        <primary>MBR</primary></indexterm><acronym>MBR</acronym>) of
+        your main disk (unless you are using another boot manager), to
+        allow you to start up with either <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> or <application>GNU/Linux</application>
+        (assuming you have <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on your system). If at some
+        point you need to reinstall <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>, the
+        <application>Microsoft</application> install process will rewrite the boot
+        sector and remove your ability to start <application>GNU/Linux</application>!</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa69">if a problem arises and you cannot
+          start <application>GNU/Linux</application> from the hard disk, this <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it58"> <primary>boot
+          disk</primary></indexterm>floppy will be the only means of
+          starting up <application>GNU/Linux</application>. It contains a fair number of system
+          tools for restoring a system that has crashed due to a power
+          failure, an unfortunate typing error, a forgotten root
+          password, or any other reason.</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>If you say <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>, you will
+      be asked to insert a disk in the drive. The floppy disk must be
+      blank or have non-critical data on it – <application>DrakX</application> will
+      format the floppy and will rewrite the whole disk.</para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti18" revision="1">Installing Updates from the Internet</title></info>
+    
+    
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-installUpdates.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im14" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa70" revision="1">At the time you are installing
+    <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>, it is likely that some packages have been
+    updated since the initial release.  Bugs may have been fixed,
+    security issues resolved. To allow you to benefit from these
+    updates, you are now able to download them from the Internet.
+    Choose <guibutton>Yes</guibutton> if you have a working Internet
+    connection, or <guibutton>No</guibutton> if you prefer to install
+    updated packages later.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa71">Choosing <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>
+    displays a list of places from which updates can be
+    retrieved. Choose the one nearest you. A package-selection tree
+    will appear: review the selection, and press
+    <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and install the
+    selected package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to
+    abort.</para>
+
+
+  </section>
+  
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-exitInstall"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti19">It's Finished!</title></info>
+    
+
+
+    <mediaobject condition="expert">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-MNF-exitInstall.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-im15" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa72" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it59"><primary>boot</primary>
+        <secondary>dual-boot</secondary></indexterm>There you
+        are. Installation is now complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system
+        is ready to use. Carefully write down the
+        <acronym>URL</acronym> given in that dialog, it's the address
+        you'll have to use in your Web browser to access the
+        <application>Mandrakesecurity</application> Web interface with
+        <literal>admin</literal> account. Now, just click
+        <guibutton>OK</guibutton> twice to reboot the system.</para>
+
+  </section>
+
+  
+  <section><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-ti20">How to Uninstall Linux</title></info>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa73">The uninstallation process consists of two
+    steps:</para>
+
+    <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa74">Delete all partitions on your hard drive
+and replace them by a single <acronym>FAT</acronym> partition with
+<application>DiskDrake</application>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa75">Uninstall the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-it30"><primary>bootloader</primary>
+<secondary>uninstall</secondary> </indexterm> bootloader (generally
+<application>GRUB</application>) from the Master Boot Record (<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, boot under
+<application>DOS</application> and run the <command>fdisk /mbr</command> command.</para>
+
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa76">If you have another <acronym>OS</acronym>, please
+        consult its documentation to determine how to perform the same
+        step.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-MNF-pa77" revision="1">Goodbye, and thank you for
+    using <application>Mandrakesecurity</application>!</para>
+
+  </section>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0baf573c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-acceptLicense-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-acceptLicense"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-ti1">Deprecated - License Terms of the
+  Distribution</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-license.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-im1" revision="3" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-pa1" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-acceptLicense-it1">
+      <primary>license</primary>
+    </indexterm>Before continuing, you should carefully read the terms of the
+  license. It covers the entire <application>Mageia</application> distribution. If you
+  agree with all the terms it contains, select <guilabel>Accept</guilabel> and
+  click on <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. If not, clicking on
+  <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> will reboot your computer.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-acceptLicense-pa2">If you are curious about any
+    technical changes which have occurred in the distribution since the last
+    release, you can click on the <guibutton>Release Notes</guibutton> button
+    to display them.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5c90b0e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-addUser-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxid-addUser" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-ti1">Deprecated - Adding a User</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx-addUser.png" width="11.5cm" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-im1"></imagedata>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa1"><application>GNU/Linux</application> is a
+  multi-user system which means each user can have his or her own preferences,
+  own files and so on. But unlike <literal>root</literal>, who is the system
+  administrator, the <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-it1">
+      <primary>users</primary>
+
+      <secondary>adding</secondary>
+    </indexterm>users you add at this point won't be authorized to change
+  anything except their own files and their own configurations, protecting the
+  system from unintentional or malicious changes which could have a serious
+  impact on it.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-addUser-pa5">You will have to create at least
+  one regular user for yourself — this is the account which you should use for
+  routine, day-to-day usage. Although it's very easy to log in as
+  <literal>root</literal> to do anything and everything, it may also be very
+  dangerous! A very simple mistake could mean that your system won't work any
+  more. If you make a serious mistake as a regular user, the worst that can
+  happen is that you'll lose some information, but you won't affect the entire
+  system.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa2">The first field asks you
+  for a real name. <application>DrakX</application> will use the first word
+  you type in this field and copy it, all in lowercase, to the <guimenu>Login
+  name</guimenu> field, which is the name this user will enter to log on to
+  the system. You can override it and change the <guimenu>Login
+  Name</guimenu>. The next step is to enter a password. From a security point
+  of view, a non-privileged (regular) user's password is not as crucial as the
+  <literal>root</literal> password, but that's no reason to neglect it by
+  making it blank or too simple: after all, <emphasis>your</emphasis> files
+  could be the ones at risk.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa3">Once you click on
+  <guimenu>Accept user</guimenu> you can add other users. Add a user for each
+  one of your friends, your father, your sister, etc. Click
+  <guimenu>Next</guimenu> when you're finished adding users.</para>
+
+  <para revision="3"></para>
+
+  <para revision="3"></para>
+
+  <tip condition="expert">
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-addUser-pa4">Clicking the
+    <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button allows you to change the default
+    <literal>shell</literal> for that user (<application>bash</application> by
+    default).</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <!-- We don't give the option to autologin anymore - Marja 20120317 - <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-autologin.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakx-im17a" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  
+ 
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa142a" revision="6">When you're finished adding
+  users, you'll be asked to choose a user who will be automatically
+  logged into the system when the computer boots up. If you're
+  interested in that feature (and don't care much about security),
+  choose the desired user (if more than one regular user is defined)
+  and select a window manager, then click on
+  <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. If you're not interested in this
+  feature, uncheck the <guilabel>Do you want to use this
+    feature?</guilabel> box.</para> -->
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1a5f73c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-ask_mntpoint_s-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s"  revision="1" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Deprecated - Choosing Mount Points</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa1">Listed here are the existing Linux
+   partitions detected on your hard drive. You can keep the choices
+   made by the wizard, since they are good for most common
+   installations. If you make any changes, you must at least define a
+   <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-it1"><primary>root</primary>
+   <secondary>partition</secondary></indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-it2"><primary>partitions</primary>
+   <secondary>root</secondary></indexterm>root partition (<literal revision="3">/</literal>). Do not choose too small a partition or you will not be able to install enough software. In most cases it is best to also create a <literal>/home</literal> partition, to store your data on (only possible if you
+   have more than one Linux partition available).</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa2">Each partition is listed
+   as follows: "Device", "Capacity", "Mount point","Type".</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa3">"Device", is structured: "hard drive type", "hard drive number", "partition number" (for example, "sda5"). </para>
+
+    
+    <!-- This paragraph might not be true, I thought I was always able to do this at this point, but now in Mga2b2 my four Mga partitions aren't mounted yet, so impossible to see what is where with "df" - Marja, 20120317 
+      <note><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa6">You can switch to tty 2 with ctrl+alt+F2 and type df to view the partitions if you're not sure installer's choice is correct and then switch back to the installer screen with ctrl+alt+F7</para></note> -->
+	  
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-ask_mntpoint_s-pa7">When the mount points are correct, or corrected, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. You'll then be given the choice to format one or more of the partitions you just chose to install Mageia on. Usually, formatting <literal>/</literal> and saving <literal>/home</literal> (if the same partition was your <literal>/home</literal> before), is a good choice.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..042d8a81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-chooseCd-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-chooseCd"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-chooseCd-ti1">Deprecated - Multiple CD-ROM
+ Installation</title></info>
+ 
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-chooseCd-pa1" revision="4">The <application>Mandriva Linux</application>
+  installation is distributed on several <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s. If a selected
+  package is located on another <acronym>CD</acronym>, <application>DrakX</application> will eject the
+  current <acronym>CD</acronym> and ask you to insert the required one. If you do not
+  have the requested <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> at hand, just click on
+  <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>, and the corresponding packages will
+  not be installed.</para>
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b8b09594
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-choosePackages-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakx-choosePackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-ti1">Deprecated - Choose Packages to Install</title></info>
+  
+
+
+
+ <!-- <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-choosePackages-pa20">Depending on the
+    installation media you are currently using, you may be first asked
+      to select the <acronym>CD</acronym>s you actually have at hand.</para> -->
+  <section xml:id="drakxid-choose-graphical-env"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-ti2" >Graphical Environment</title></info>  
+   
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choose-graphical-env-it5"> <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>graphical environment</secondary></indexterm>
+      <guilabel>Graphical Environment</guilabel>: this is where you
+      will choose your preferred graphical environment. At least one
+      must be selected if you want to have a graphical interface
+      available.</para>
+    </section>
+
+ <section xml:id="drakxid-choosePackages"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackagesGroups-ti3" revision="1">Choose Package
+   Groups to Install</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+   <imageobject>
+    <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-choosePackages.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-im1" revision="3" width="11.5cm"/>
+   </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it1"><primary>packages</primary>
+    <secondary>installing</secondary></indexterm>It's now time to
+    specify which programs you wish to install on your system. There
+    are thousands of packages available for <application>Mageia</application>, and to
+    make it simpler to manage, they have been placed into groups of
+    similar applications.</para>
+
+
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa2" revision="3"><application>Mageia</application> sorts package groups into
+   categories. You can mix and match applications from the various
+   categories, so a <guilabel>Workstation</guilabel> installation can
+   still have applications from the <guilabel>Server</guilabel>
+   category installed.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist revision="5" inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa3" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it2"> <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>workstation</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Workstation</guilabel>:
+      if you plan to use your machine as a workstation, select one or
+      more of the groups in this category. The special
+      <literal>LSB</literal> group will configure your system so that
+      it complies as much as possible with the <link xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xlink:href="http://www.linuxbase.org/">Linux Standard Base
+      Project</link> specifications.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it4"> <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>server</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Server</guilabel>:
+      if your machine is intended to be a server, select which of the
+      more common services you wish to install on your machine.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa7" revision="11">Moving the
+	mouse cursor over a group name will display a short
+	explanatory text about that group.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it6">
+      <primary>packages</primary>
+      <secondary>individual selection</secondary>
+    </indexterm>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa11" revision="4">You can
+      check the <guilabel>Individual package selection</guilabel> box,
+      which is useful if you're familiar with the packages being
+      offered or if you want to have total control over what will be
+      installed.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa12" revision="11">If you
+      start the installation in <guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel> mode,
+      you can deselect all groups and prevent the installation of any new
+      packages. This is useful for repairing or updating an existing
+      system.</para>
+
+</section>
+
+      
+   <section condition="expert" xml:id="minimal-install"><info><title xml:id="BId-minimal-install-ti4" revision="1">Minimal Installation</title></info>
+      
+   <para xml:id="BIdNEW-minimal-install-pa19" revision="3">If you
+    deselect all groups when performing a regular installation (as
+    opposed to an upgrade), a new dialog shows after pressing the
+    <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button, suggesting different options
+    for a minimal installation:</para>
+
+   <itemizedlist xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-choosePackages-item1" revision="2">
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa8"><guilabel>With
+       X</guilabel>: install the minimum number of packages possible
+       to have a working graphical desktop.</para>
+    </listitem>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa9"><guilabel>With basic
+       documentation</guilabel>: installs the base system plus basic
+       utilities and their documentation. This installation is
+       suitable for setting up a server.</para>
+    </listitem>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa10" revision="13"><guilabel>Truly minimal install</guilabel>:
+       installs the absolute minimum number of packages necessary to
+       get a working <application>Linux</application> system. With this installation you
+       will only have a command-line interface.</para>
+    </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+ <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-choosePackagesTree"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackagesTree-ti5" revision="1">Choosing
+   Individual Packages to Install</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+   <imageobject>
+    <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-choosePackagesTree.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-im2" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+   </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa13" revision="2">If you choose
+   to install packages individually, the installer will present a tree
+   structure containing all packages classified by groups and
+   subgroups. While browsing the tree, you can select entire groups,
+   subgroups, or individual packages.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa14">Whenever you select a
+   package on the tree, a description will appear on the right to let
+   you know the purpose of that package.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa15" revision="2">If a server
+    package has been selected, either because you specifically chose
+    the individual package or because it was part of a group of
+    packages, you will be asked to confirm that you really want those
+    server packages to be installed. By default <application>Mageia</application> will
+    automatically start any installed services (servers) at boot
+    time. Even if they are safe and have no known issues at the time
+    the distribution was shipped, it is entirely possible that
+    security holes were discovered after this version of
+    <application>Mageia</application> was finalized. If you don't know what a
+    particular service is supposed to do or why it's being installed,
+    then click <guibutton>No</guibutton>.</para>
+    </warning>
+
+  
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa16" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-it7">
+     <primary>dependencies</primary>
+     <secondary>automatic</secondary></indexterm> The <guilabel>Show
+     automatically selected packages</guilabel> option is used to
+     disable the warning dialog. Those appear whenever the installer
+     automatically selects a package to resolve a dependency issue.
+     Some packages depend on others and the installation of one
+     particular package may require the installation of another
+     one. The installer can determine which packages are required to
+     satisfy a dependency and to successfully complete the
+     installation.</para>
+
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-choosePackages-pa17" revision="4">The little
+   floppy disk icon at the bottom of the list allows you to load or
+   save the packages list. This is useful if you have a number of
+   machines that you wish to configure identically. Click on this icon
+   and select whether you wish to <guilabel>Load</guilabel> or
+   <guilabel>Save</guilabel> the packages list, then select the medium
+   in the following screen and click on the <guibutton>Ok</guibutton>
+   button.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..170f6b26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-doPartitionDisks-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-doPartitionDisks"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Partitioning your Disk</title></info>
+  
+
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-doPartitionDisks.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa1" revision="2">You now
+   need to decide where you want to install <application>Mageia</application> on your
+   hard drive. If your hard drive is empty or if an existing operating
+   system is using all the available space you will have to
+   re-partition the drive. Basically, partitioning a hard drive means
+   to logically divide it in order to create the space required for
+   your new <application>Mageia</application> system.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa2" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it3"><primary>partitions</primary><secondary>DrakX</secondary>
+    </indexterm>Because the process of partitioning a hard drive is
+    usually irreversible and can lead to data loss, partitioning can
+    be intimidating and stressful for the inexperienced
+    user. Fortunately, <application>DrakX</application> includes a wizard which simplifies
+    this process. Before continuing with this step, read through the
+    rest of this section and, above all, take your time.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa3" revision="2">Depending on the
+  configuration of your hard drive, several options are available:</para>
+
+  
+  
+  <itemizedlist revision="2">
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa4"><guibutton>Use free
+      space</guibutton>. This option will perform an automatic partitioning of
+      your blank drive(s). If you use this option there will be no further
+      prompts.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa5" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it1"><primary>mount
+	points</primary></indexterm><guibutton>Use existing
+	partitions</guibutton>. The wizard has detected one or more
+	existing <application>Linux</application> partitions on your hard drive. If you
+	want to use them, choose this option. You will then be asked
+	to choose the mount points associated with each of the
+	partitions. The legacy mount points are selected by default,
+	and for the most part it's a good idea to keep them. You will
+	also be asked to choose the partitions to be formatted or
+	preserved.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+
+
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa6" revision="15"><guibutton>Use the free space on the Windows
+      partition</guibutton>. If <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> is installed on your hard
+      drive, you might have to create free space for <application>GNU/Linux</application>. To do
+      so, you can delete your <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition and data (see the
+      <quote>Erase entire disk</quote> solution below) or resize your
+      <acronym>FAT</acronym> or <acronym>NTFS</acronym>
+      partition. Resizing can be performed without the loss of any
+      data, <emphasis>provided you've previously defragmented the
+      <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition. Backing up your data is strongly
+      recommended</emphasis>. Using this option is recommended if you
+      want to use both <application>Mageia</application> and <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> on the same
+      computer in a <emphasis>dual boot</emphasis> configuration.</para>
+
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa7" revision="1">Before
+      choosing this option, please understand that after this
+      procedure, the size of your <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition will be
+      smaller than when you started, which means you will have less
+      free space to store your data or to install new software.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa8" revision="1"><guibutton>Erase entire disk</guibutton>. If you
+      want to delete all data and all partitions present on your hard
+      drive and replace them with <application>Mageia</application>, choose this
+      option. Be warned that you won't be able to undo this operation
+      after you confirm.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa9">If you choose this option,
+        <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will be deleted.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa10" revision="4"><guibutton>Remove Windows(TM)</guibutton>. This
+      option appears when the hard drive is entirely taken by
+      <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>. Choosing this option will simply erase everything
+      on the drive, partitioning everything from scratch.</para>
+
+      <warning>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa11">If you choose this
+        option, <emphasis>all</emphasis> data on your disk will be
+        lost.</para>
+      </warning>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-pa12" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-it2">
+       <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>custom</secondary>
+       </indexterm><guibutton>Custom disk
+       partitioning</guibutton>. Choose this option if you want to
+       manually partition your hard drive. Be careful: it is a
+       powerful but dangerous choice and you can very easily lose all
+       your data. That's why this option is only recommended if you
+       have performed custom disk partitioning before, and have enough
+       <application>GNU/Linux</application> experience to know what you are doing. For more instructions on how to use the
+       <application>DiskDrake</application> utility, refer to <phrase condition="Starter" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph1"><xref linkend="diskdrake"/></phrase><phrase condition="Discovery" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph3">the <citetitle xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct1">Managing Your Partitions</citetitle>
+       section in the <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="QSP" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ph4">the
+       <citetitle xml:id="BId-drakxid-doPartitionDisks-ct2">Managing Your Partitions</citetitle>
+       section in the <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></phrase>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..81118d87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-exitInstal-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-exitInstall" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-ti1">Deprecated - It's Done!</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-exitInstall.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa1" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it1"><primary>boot</primary>
+   <secondary>dual-boot</secondary></indexterm>There you are. The
+   installation is now complete and your <application>GNU/Linux</application> system is ready to
+   be used. Just click on <guibutton>Reboot</guibutton> to restart the
+   system. Don't forget to remove the installation media (<acronym>CD-ROM</acronym> or
+   floppy). The first thing you should see after your computer has
+   finished doing its hardware tests is the bootloader menu, which
+   allows you to choose between the <acronym>OS</acronym>es your
+   system can boot.</para>
+  
+ <section><info><title xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-ti2">Advanced Options</title></info>
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa2" revision="5">The
+   <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button shows more buttons
+   to:</para>
+    
+  <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it2"><primary>floppy</primary>
+      <secondary>auto-install</secondary>
+      </indexterm><guibutton>Generate auto-install floppy</guibutton>:
+      enables you to create an installation floppy disk which will
+      automatically perform a whole installation, similar to the one
+      just finished, without the help of an operator.</para>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa4">Note that two different
+     options are available after clicking on that button:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+     <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa5"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it3">
+	<primary>installation</primary><secondary>replay</secondary>
+	</indexterm><guibutton>Replay</guibutton>. This is a partially
+	automated installation. The partitioning step is the only
+	interactive procedure.</para>
+     </listitem>
+     <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa6"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it4">
+	<primary>installation</primary>
+	<secondary>automated</secondary>
+	</indexterm><guibutton>Automated</guibutton>. Fully automated
+	installation: <emphasis>the hard disk is completely rewritten,
+	all data is lost</emphasis>.</para>
+     </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+
+
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-pa9">This feature is very
+     handy when installing on a number of similar machines. See the
+     <link xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xlink:href="http://www.mandrakelinux.com/drakx/auto_inst.html">Auto
+     install</link> section on our web site for more
+     information.</para>
+   </listitem>
+      
+   <listitem>
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa7" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-it5">
+      <primary>installation</primary> <secondary>save package
+      selection</secondary> </indexterm><guibutton>Save package
+      selection</guibutton><footnote><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-exitInstall-pa8" revision="3">If you chose to
+      save on a floppy, you will need a <acronym>FAT</acronym>-formatted floppy. To
+      create one under <application>GNU/Linux</application>, type <command>mformat a:</command>
+      or, as root, <command>fdformat /dev/fd0</command> followed by
+      <command>mkfs.vfat /dev/fd0</command>.</para></footnote>: saves
+      a list of the packages selected in this installation. The
+      following screen shows you the possible media to use to save the
+      package list onto: you might need to fill some parameters when
+      you click on the <guilabel>Next</guilabel> button.</para>
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-exitInstall-pa10">To use this selection
+     of packages with another installation, perform the installation
+     as usual up to the point of the package selection, and choose to
+     select individual packages, without worrying about the current
+     package selection. Use the floppy icon and select the
+     <guilabel>Load</guilabel> option. Then choose the medium which
+     contains the package list. Finally click
+     <guibutton>OK</guibutton>: the list of packages you loaded will
+     be selected and be installed.</para>
+   </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dbc0a9b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-formatPartitions-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-formatPartitions" revision="1" condition="extra"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-ti1">Deprecated - Choose Partitions to Be Formatted</title></info>
+
+
+  
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa8" revision="2">This
+   step is available only if you chose to reuse existing
+   <application>Linux</application> partitions.</para>
+  </note>
+
+ <mediaobject condition="expert">
+  <imageobject>
+   <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+  </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+  
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa2" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it1">
+   <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>formatting</secondary></indexterm>If
+   you chose to reuse some legacy <application>GNU/Linux</application> partitions, you may wish
+   to reformat some of them and erase any data they contain. To do so,
+   please select those partitions as well.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa3">Please note that it's
+   not necessary to reformat all <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it2">
+   <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>pre-existing</secondary>
+   </indexterm>pre-existing partitions. You must reformat the
+   partitions containing the operating system (such as
+   <literal>/</literal>, <literal>/usr</literal> or
+   <literal>/var</literal>) but not the partitions containing data you
+   wish to keep (typically <literal>/home</literal>).</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa4" revision="1">Please be
+  careful when selecting partitions. After the formatting is
+  completed, <emphasis>all data on the selected partitions will be
+  deleted</emphasis> and you won't be able to recover it.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa5" revision="1">Click on
+    <guibutton>Next</guibutton> when you're ready to format the
+    partitions.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa6" revision="1">Click on
+    <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> if you want to choose other
+    partitions for your new <application>Mageia</application> operating system
+    installation.</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-pa7">Click on
+    <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> if you wish to select partitions
+    which will be checked for <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-formatPartitions-it3">
+    <primary>partitions</primary><secondary>bad
+    blocks</secondary></indexterm>bad blocks on the disk.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..07c7c753
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-installUpdates-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-installUpdates"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Installing Updates from the Internet</title></info>
+  
+  
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-installUpdates.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-pa1" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-installUpdates-it1">
+  <primary>installation</primary><secondary>updates</secondary></indexterm>
+  <indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-installUpdates-it2"><primary>updates</primary></indexterm>By
+  the time you install <application>Mageia</application>, it's likely that some packages
+  will have been updated since the initial release. Bugs may have been
+  fixed, security issues resolved, etc. To allow you to benefit from
+  these updates, you're now able to download them from the
+  Internet. Select <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> if you have a working
+  Internet connection and you want to install any updated packages
+  now, or <guilabel>No</guilabel> if you prefer to install updated
+  packages later.</para>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-installUpdates-pa2" revision="2">Choosing
+  <guilabel>Yes</guilabel> will display a list of web locations from
+  which updates can be retrieved. You should choose one near to you. A
+  tree containing package selections will appear: review the
+  selection, and press <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to retrieve and
+  install the selected package(s), or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to
+  abort.</para>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-intro.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f66285c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-intro.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakx-intro" role="titlepage">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakx-intro-ti1">About the Installer Help Manual</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this
+    manual. Which screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the
+    choices you make while installing.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC
+  BY-SA 3.0 license <link xlink:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link></para>
+
+  <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link xlink:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link xlink:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link></para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4a9898b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-misc-params-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakx-misc-params"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti1">Deprecated - Checking Miscellaneous Parameters</title></info>
+  
+  
+ <section xml:id="drakxid-summary"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti2" revision="1">Summary</title></info>
+    
+    
+    <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-summary">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-summary.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+    
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa1" revision="4"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it16">
+   <primary>configuration</primary> </indexterm>As a review,
+   <application>DrakX</application> will present a summary of information it has gathered
+   about your system. Depending on the hardware installed on your
+   machine, you may have some or all of the following entries. Each
+   entry is made up of the hardware item to be configured, followed by
+   a quick summary of the current configuration. Click on the
+   corresponding <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button to make any
+   changes.</para>
+
+   <itemizedlist>
+    
+    <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa3" revision="2"><guilabel>Timezone</guilabel>: <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it2"><primary>time
+     zone</primary><secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm>by
+     default, <application>DrakX</application> deduces your time zone based on the country
+     you have chosen. You can click on the
+     <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button here if this is not
+     correct.</para>
+   </listitem>
+  
+   <listitem>    
+    <para xml:id="drakxidselectCountry" revision="5"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it54a"> <primary>country</primary>
+     <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+     </indexterm><guilabel>Country / Region</guilabel>: check the
+     current country selection. If you're not in the country selected
+     by <application>DrakX</application>, click on the <guibutton>Configure</guibutton>
+     button and choose another. If your country isn't in the list
+     shown, click on the <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> button to get a
+     complete country list.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa152a" revision="3"><guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>: if you wish to
+     change your bootloader configuration, click this button. This
+     should be reserved to advanced users. Refer to the printed
+     documentation or the in-line help about bootloader configuration
+     in the <application>Mageia Control Center</application>.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa155b"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57c">
+      <primary>services</primary> <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+      </indexterm><guilabel>Services</guilabel>: with this entry
+      you can fine tune which services will be run on your machine. If
+      you plan to use this machine as a server it's a good idea to
+      review this setup.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+     
+   
+    <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa2" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it1"> <primary>keyboard</primary>
+     <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+     </indexterm><guilabel>Keyboard</guilabel>: check the current
+     keyboard map configuration and change it if necessary.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa4"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it3"> <primary>mouse</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Mouse</guilabel>:
+      verify the current mouse configuration and click on the button
+      to change it if necessary.</para>
+   </listitem>
+
+<!--  Printers are no longer in Summary section or Installer - John
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakxid-configurePrinter" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it4"> <primary>printer</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Printer</guilabel>:
+      clicking on the <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button will
+      open the printer configuration wizard. Consult <phrase xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph2" condition="Discovery">the
+      corresponding chapter of the
+      <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="Startonly" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph3" revision="1"><xref linkend="printerdrake"/></phrase><phrase condition="only-in-ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph4" revision="1"><xref linkend="printerdrake"/></phrase> for more information on how to
+      set up a new printer. The interface presented in our manual is
+      similar to the one used during installation.</para>
+   </listitem>
+
+-->
+
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakxid-sound_config" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it5"> <primary>sound card</primary>
+       <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+       </indexterm><guilabel>Sound card</guilabel>: if a sound card is
+       detected on your system, it will be displayed here. If you
+       notice the sound card isn't the one actually present on your
+       system, you can click on the button and choose a different
+       driver.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <!--  TV cards are no longer in Summary section or Installer - Marja
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa5" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it6"> <primary>tv card</primary>
+       <secondary>configuration</secondary> </indexterm><guilabel>TV
+       card</guilabel>: if you have a TV card, this is where
+       information about its configuration will be displayed. If you
+       want to try a different driver for your TV card, or its
+       detection wasn't accurate you can click on
+       <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to try to configure it
+       manually.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   --> 
+
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa152b" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57b">
+       <primary>graphical interface</primary>
+       <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+       </indexterm><guilabel>Graphical Interface</guilabel>: by
+       default, <application>DrakX</application> configures your graphical interface with
+       a resolution that best matches your video card and monitor
+       combination. If that doesn't suit you, or <application>DrakX</application> could
+     not automatically configure it (<guilabel>not
+       configured</guilabel> is displayed), click on
+       <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> to reconfigure your graphical
+       interface. You can click on <guibutton>Help</guibutton> from
+       within the configuration wizard to benefit from full in-line
+       help.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa152c" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it57d">
+      <primary>network</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm>
+      <guilabel>Network</guilabel>: if you wish to configure your
+      Internet or local network access, you can do so from here. Refer to
+      the printed documentation or use the <application>Mageia Control Center</application> after the
+      installation has finished to benefit from full in-line
+      help.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-pa62" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it17"> <primary>network</primary>
+      <secondary>proxy</secondary>
+      </indexterm><guilabel>Proxies</guilabel>: allows you to configure
+      <acronym>HTTP</acronym> and <acronym>FTP</acronym> proxy addresses if the machine you're
+      installing on is to be located behind a proxy server.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="drakx-pa155a"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it58a">
+      <primary>security</primary>
+      <secondary>configuration</secondary></indexterm><guilabel>Security
+      Level</guilabel>: this entry allows you to redefine the security
+      level<phrase condition="Starter" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ph1">
+      as set in a previous step (see <xref linkend="drakxidmiscellaneous"/>)</phrase>.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    
+    <para xml:id="draxid-tinyfirewall" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="drakx-it59a"> <primary>firewall</primary>
+    <secondary>configuration</secondary>
+    </indexterm><guilabel>Firewall</guilabel>: if you plan to connect
+    your machine to the Internet, it's a good idea to protect yourself
+    from intrusions by setting up a firewall. Consult <phrase condition="Discovery" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph5">the
+    corresponding chapter of the
+    <citetitle>Starter Guide</citetitle></phrase><phrase condition="Startonly" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph6" revision="2"><xref linkend="tinyfirewall"/></phrase><phrase condition="only-in-ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-ph7" revision="2"><xref linkend="tinyfirewall"/></phrase> for details
+    about firewall settings.</para>
+   </listitem>
+   
+   
+  </itemizedlist>
+ </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="drakxidconfigureTimezoneGMT" revision="11" role="manual"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti3" revision="2">Time Zone Options</title></info>
+    
+    
+  
+  <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-configureTimezoneGMT">
+   <imageobject>
+    <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureTimezoneGMT.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im2" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/>
+   </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  
+  <para condition="no-inline-help" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa7" revision="3">This dialog appears after selecting a new time zone in
+   the time zones list. After you've chosen the location nearest to
+   your time zone, two more options are shown.</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa8" revision="1"><application>GNU/Linux</application> manages
+   time in <acronym>GMT</acronym> (Greenwich Mean Time) and translates it to local time
+   according to the time zone you selected. If the clock on your
+   motherboard is set to local time, you may deactivate this by
+   deselecting <guilabel>Hardware clock set to GMT</guilabel>, which
+   will let <application>GNU/Linux</application> know that the system clock and the hardware
+   clock are in the same time zone. This is useful when the machine
+   also hosts another operating system.</para>
+    
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa9" revision="3">The
+    <guilabel>Automatic time synchronization</guilabel> option will
+    automatically regulate the system clock by connecting to a remote
+    time server on the Internet. For this feature to work, you must
+    have a working Internet connection. We recommend that you choose a
+    time server located near you or the generic <guilabel>World
+    Wide</guilabel> entry which will select the best server for
+    you. This option actually installs a time server which can be used
+    by other machines on your local network as well.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  
+
+
+
+  <section condition="expert" xml:id="drakxidconfigureServices"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-ti10">Selecting Available Services
+   at Boot Time</title></info>
+  
+  
+  
+  <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-configureServices">
+   <imageobject>
+    <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureServices.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-im5" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/>
+   </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa57" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-it15"> <primary>services</primary>
+   </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakx-misc-params-it18">
+   <primary>boot</primary><secondary>services</secondary></indexterm>This
+   dialog is used to select which services you wish to start at boot
+   time.</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa58" revision="2"><application>DrakX</application> will
+   list all services available on the current installation. Review
+   each of them carefully and uncheck those which aren't needed at
+   boot time.</para>
+
+  <tip>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa59" revision="1">A short
+    explanatory text will be displayed about a service when it is
+    selected. However, if you're not sure whether a service is useful
+    or not, it is safer to leave the default behavior.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+  <warning>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakx-misc-params-pa60" revision="2">At this stage,
+    be very careful if you intend to use your machine as a server: you
+    probably don't want to start any services which you don't
+    need. Please remember that some services can be dangerous if
+    they're enabled on a server. In general, select only those
+    services you <emphasis>really</emphasis> need.</para>
+  </warning>
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b374745f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-miscellaneous-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-miscellaneous"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-ti1">Deprecated - Security Level</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-miscellaneous.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa1" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-it1"><primary>security</primary>
+   <secondary>level</secondary></indexterm>At this point, <application>DrakX</application>
+   allows you to choose your machine's security level. As a rule of
+   thumb, the security level should be set higher if the machine is to
+   contain crucial data, or if it's to be directly exposed to the
+   Internet. The trade-off is that a higher security level is
+   generally obtained at the expense of ease of use.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa2" revision="3">If you don't
+  know what to choose, keep the default option. You'll be able to
+  change it later with the <application>draksec</application> tool<phrase condition="not-in-QSPlus" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-miscellaneous-ph1">
+  (see <xref linkend="draksec"/>)</phrase>.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-miscellaneous-pa3" revision="1">Fill the
+  <guilabel>Security Administrator</guilabel> field with the e-mail
+  address of the person responsible for security. Security-related
+  messages will be sent to that address.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c8025e2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-partition_with_diskdrake-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake"  userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-ti1">Deprecated - Format Disks with DiskDrake</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa1">At this point,
+    you need to choose which partition(s) will be used for the
+    installation of your <application>Mandriva Linux</application> system. If partitions have
+    already been defined, either from a previous installation of
+    <application>GNU/Linux</application> or by another partitioning tool, you can use existing
+    partitions. Otherwise, hard drive partitions must be
+    defined.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa2">To create
+    partitions, you must first select a hard drive. You can select the
+    disk for partitioning by clicking on <quote>hda</quote> for the
+    first IDE drive, <quote>hdb</quote> for the second,
+    <quote>sda</quote> for the first <acronym>SCSI</acronym> drive and so on.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa3">To partition
+    the selected hard drive, you can use these options:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa4"><guibutton>Clear
+      all</guibutton>: this option deletes all partitions on the
+      selected hard drive</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa5" revision="1"><guibutton>Auto allocate</guibutton>: this option
+      enables you to automatically create <acronym>ext3</acronym> and swap partitions
+      in the free space of your hard drive</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa6" revision="1"><guibutton>More</guibutton>: gives access to
+	additional features:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa7"><guibutton>Save
+   partition table</guibutton>: saves the partition table to a
+   floppy. Useful for later partition-table recovery if necessary. It
+   is strongly recommended that you perform this step.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa8"><guibutton>Restore
+   partition table</guibutton>: allows you to restore a previously
+   saved partition table from a floppy disk.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa9"><guibutton>Rescue
+   partition table</guibutton>: if your partition table is damaged,
+   you can try to recover it using this option. Please be careful and
+   remember that it doesn't always work.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa10"><guibutton>Reload
+   partition table</guibutton>: discards all changes and reloads the
+   partition table that was originally on the hard drive.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa11"><guilabel>Removable
+   media auto-mounting</guilabel>: unchecking this option will force
+   users to manually mount and unmount removable media such as
+   floppies and <acronym>CD-ROM</acronym>s.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa12"><guibutton>Wizard</guibutton>:
+   use this option if you wish to use a wizard to partition your hard
+   drive. This is recommended if you do not have a good understanding
+   of partitioning.</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa13"><guibutton>Undo</guibutton>:
+   use this option to cancel your changes.</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem><para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa14"><guibutton>Toggle
+   between normal/expert mode</guibutton>: allows additional actions
+   on partitions (type, options, format) and gives more information
+   about the hard drive.</para></listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa15"><guibutton>Done</guibutton>:
+   when you are finished partitioning your hard drive, this will save
+   your changes back to disk.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <tip>
+      <para xml:id="drakx-pa71a">When defining the size of a partition,
+      you can finely set the partition size by using the
+      <keysym>Arrow</keysym> keys of your keyboard.</para>
+    </tip>
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa16">Note: you can
+    reach any option using the keyboard. Navigate through the
+    partitions using <keycap>Tab</keycap> and the
+    <keycap>Up/Down</keycap> arrows.</para>
+    
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa17">When a partition is selected, you can
+       use:<itemizedlist>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa18"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>c</keysym></keycombo>
+       to create a new partition (when an empty partition is
+       selected)</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa19"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>d</keysym></keycombo>
+       to delete a partition</para>
+	</listitem>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa20"><keycombo><keysym>Ctrl-</keysym><keysym>m</keysym></keycombo>
+       to set the mount point</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </itemizedlist></para> 
+
+    <note revision="10">
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa21">To get
+    information about the different file system types available,
+    please read the <acronym>ext2FS</acronym> chapter from the
+    <citetitle>Reference Manual</citetitle>.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para condition="ppc" xml:id="BId-drakxid-partition_with_diskdrake-pa22" revision="1">If you
+   are installing on a PPC machine, you will want to create a small
+   HFS <quote>bootstrap</quote> partition of at least 1<acronym>MB</acronym> which
+   will be used by the <application>yaboot</application>
+   bootloader. If you opt to make the partition a bit larger, say
+   50<acronym>MB</acronym>, you may find it a useful place to store a spare kernel
+   and ramdisk images for emergency boot situations.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..76a4c092
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-resizeFATChoose-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+<section condition="extended" userlevel="expert" version="5.0"
+         xml:id="drakxid-resizeFATChoose"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-ti1">Deprecated - Choose FAT Partition to Be
+    Resized</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa1"><indexterm>
+      <primary>partitions</primary>
+
+      <secondary>resize</secondary>
+    </indexterm> More than one <application>Microsoft</application> partition
+  has been detected on your hard drive. Please choose the one which you want
+  to resize in order to install your new <application>Mageia</application>
+  operating system.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa2">Each partition is listed as
+  follows: "Linux name", "Windows name", "Capacity".</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa3">"Linux name" is structured:
+  "hard drive type", "hard drive number", "partition number" (for example,
+  "sda1").</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa4">"Hard drive type" is "sd"
+  </para>
+
+  <para>This is standard for hard drives now and has nothing to do with SD
+  Memory Cards. Hard drives were previously prefixed "hd" for IDE drives or
+  "sd" for SATA drives but they are all now prefixed with "sd". <!-- (mentioning SCSI doesn't seem needed anymore - Marja) if it is a <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drive.
+I rewrote it and added it back - MrsB--></para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa5">"Hard drive number" is
+  actually a letter and always follows "sd": <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa6">"a" means "first hard
+        drive";</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa7">"b" means "second hard
+        drive";</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa8">and so on...</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist></para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-resizeFATChoose-pa11">"Windows name" is the letter
+  of your hard drive under
+  <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> (the first
+  disk or partition is called "C:").</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f4fd5c40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectInstallClass-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectInstallClass" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-ti1">Deprecated - Installation Class</title></info>
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="drakx-pa19a" revision="1">This step is shown only if an
+    existing <application>GNU/Linux</application> partition is found on your machine.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectInstallClass.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa1" revision="1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-it1"><primary>installation</primary>
+   <secondary>class</secondary></indexterm><application>DrakX</application> now needs to
+   know if you want to install from scratch or upgrade your existing
+   <application>Mageia</application> system:</para>
+
+
+
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+
+<listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa3" revision="2"><guilabel>Upgrade</guilabel>.<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-it2" revision="2">
+     <primary>upgrade</primary></indexterm>If you have an older <application>Mageia</application> operating system, this option allows you to upgrade it. Your existing partitioning scheme and user data won't be altered. Most of the other configuration steps remain available and are similar to a standard installation.</para>
+  </listitem>
+
+  <listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa2" revision="4"><guilabel>Install</guilabel>. Use this option for everything except upgrading an existing Mageia installation.<!-- Removed - simon, grenoya and marja think it is not needed: - For the most part, this
+    completely wipes out the old system. However, depending on your
+    partitioning scheme, you can prevent some of your existing data
+    (particularly <literal>/home</literal> directories) from being
+    overwritten. If you wish to change how your hard drives are
+    partitioned, or to change the file system, you should use this
+      option.--></para>
+  </listitem>
+  
+  
+  
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+
+<!-- This note is not needed, now. To be used again when we have older Mageia versions from which upgrading is no longer supported. -marja
+ <note revision="12">
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectInstallClass-pa4" revision="1">Using the
+   <quote>Upgrade</quote> option should work fine on <application>Mageia</application>
+   systems running version <literal>1</literal> or later. Performing
+   an upgrade on prior versions is not recommended.</para>
+ </note> -->
+
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..20aaf6d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectKeyboard-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectKeyboard"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring the Keyboard</title></info>
+  
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa5">DrakX shows one or more keyboards, depending on which language(s) you have chosen</para>
+  </note>
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+  <imageobject>
+   <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectKeyboard.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+  </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa1" revision="3"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-it1"><primary>keyboard</primary>
+  </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectKeyboard-it2">
+  <primary>language</primary><secondary>keyboard</secondary></indexterm>Depending
+  on the language you chose (see <xref linkend="drakxid-selectLanguage"/>), <application>DrakX</application> automatically
+  selects a particular type of keyboard configuration. Verify that the
+  selection suits you or choose another keyboard layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. You can also look here: <link xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>
+</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa2">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <guibutton revision="1">More</guibutton> to get a full list, and select your keyboard there. Note that after having chosen your keyboard, you will return to the first screen and it'll seem that a keyboard from this first screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this and go on, the keyboard you chose from the full list will now be configured! </para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa3">If you choose a keyboard
+    layout based on a non-Latin alphabet, the next dialog will allow
+    you to choose the key binding which will switch the keyboard
+    between the Latin and non-Latin layouts.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectKeyboard-pa4" revision="1">Additional information: You may have a keyboard which does not correspond exactly to your language: for example, if you are an English-speaking Swiss native, you may have a Swiss keyboard. Or if you speak English and are located in Québec, you may find yourself in the same situation where your native language and country-set keyboard don't match. In either case, this installation step will allow you to select an appropriate keyboard. </para>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c832398b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectLanguage-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-selectLanguage" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-ti1">Deprecated - Choosing your Language</title></info>    
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa1" revision="1">The first step is to
+   choose your preferred language.</para>
+  
+ <figure xml:id="selectLanguage-fig" revision="2"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-ti2">Choosing the Default
+  Language</title></info>
+  
+  <mediaobject>
+   <imageobject>
+    <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-im1" revision="4" width="11.5cm"/>
+   </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+ </figure>    
+  
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa2" revision="5"><indexterm
+      xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-it1">
+      <primary>language</primary>
+    </indexterm>First open the tree relative to the continent you are located in, and then choose
+    the language you speak. Your language choice will affect the installer, the documentation, and
+    the system in general. </para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa3" revision="3">Click the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> button near the botom of the list to go to the screen to select additional languages for your workstation, thereby installing the
+    language-specific files for system documentation and
+    applications. For example, if Spanish friends are to use your
+    machine, select English as the default language in the first screen
+    and <guilabel>Español</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> screen.</para>
+
+<note>
+<para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa4" revision="2">You are advised to install the language of your keyboard and the language of the country you live in as additional languages if they are not the same as your preferred language.</para>
+ </note>
+
+  <note>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa5" revision="2">About
+      <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> (unicode) support: Unicode is a
+      character encoding intended to cover all existing
+      languages. <application>Mageia Linux</application> uses <acronym>UTF-8</acronym> by default for all languages</para>
+
+
+  <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa6" revision="1">If you know UTF-8 encoding doesn't work well for your language, tick the box <guilabel>Old compatibility (non-UTF) encoding</guilabel> at the top of the <guilabel>Multiple languages</guilabel> screen</para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem>
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa7" revision="1">Be aware that this will then apply to all languages on your system</para>
+   </listitem>
+     </orderedlist>
+ </note>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectLanguage-pa4" revision="4">Note that
+    you're not limited to choosing a single additional language. You
+    may choose several, or even install them all by selecting the
+    <guilabel>All languages</guilabel> box. Selecting support for a
+    language means translations, fonts, spell checkers, etc. will also
+    be installed for that language. Make sure you select all languages
+    which are likely to be useful on the machine now, it may be difficult
+    to configure support for languages not chosen at
+    install time at a later date.</para>
+
+
+
+ <tip>
+  <para xml:id="drakx-pa18a" revision="2">To switch between the various
+   languages installed on your system, you can launch the
+   <command>localedrake</command> command as <literal>root</literal> to
+   change the language used by the entire system. Running the command
+   as a regular user will only change the language settings for that
+   particular user.</para>
+  </tip>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..65f40489
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectMouse-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-selectMouse" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse</title></info>
+  
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-selectMouse.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa1" revision="12"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-it1"><primary>mouse</primary></indexterm>Usually,
+  <application>DrakX</application> has no problems detecting the number of buttons on your
+  mouse. If it fails to properly recognize it, it assumes you have a
+  two-button mouse and will configure it for third-button
+  emulation. The third-button mouse button of a two-button mouse can
+  be obtained by simultaneously clicking the left and right mouse
+  buttons. <application>DrakX</application> will automatically know whether your mouse
+  uses a <acronym>PS/2</acronym>, serial or <acronym>USB</acronym> interface.</para>
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectMouse-pa5" revision="2">If you have a
+   3-button mouse without a wheel, you can choose a <guilabel>with
+   Wheel emulation</guilabel> mouse. <application>DrakX</application> will then configure
+   your mouse so that you can simulate the wheel with it: to do so,
+   press the middle button and move your mouse pointer up and down.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa2">If for some reason you wish
+    to specify a different type of mouse, select it from the list
+    provided.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+  <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-selectMouse-pa6">You can select the
+    <guilabel>Universal | Any PS/2 &amp; USB mice</guilabel> entry to
+    choose a <quote>generic</quote> mouse type which will work with
+    nearly all mice.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa3" revision="12">If you choose a
+  mouse other than the default one, a test screen will be
+  displayed. Use the buttons and wheel to verify that the settings are
+  correct and that the mouse is working correctly. If the mouse isn't
+  working well, press the <keycap>space</keycap> bar or
+  <keycap>Enter</keycap> key to cancel the test and you will be
+  returned to the mouse list.</para>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-it2">
+   <primary>mouse</primary> <secondary>Wheel</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+ <note>
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectMouse-pa4" revision="3">Occasionally
+   wheel mice are not detected automatically, so you will need to
+   select your mouse from a list. Be sure to select the one
+   corresponding to the port that your mouse is attached to. After
+   selecting a mouse and pressing the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+   button, a mouse image will be displayed on-screen. Scroll the
+   mouse wheel to ensure that it is correctly activated. As you
+   scroll your mouse wheel, you will see the on-screen scroll wheel
+   moving. Test the buttons and check that the mouse pointer moves
+   on-screen as you move your mouse about.</para>
+ </note>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..740c6e80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-selectSerialPort-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-selectSerialPort" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectSerialPort-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring your Mouse</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+    <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-selectSerialPort-pa1" revision="10">Please select the correct
+port. For example, the <literal>COM1</literal> port under <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application>
+is named <literal>ttyS0</literal> under <application>GNU/Linux</application>.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f8b42140
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setRootPassword-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-ti1">Deprecated - Root
+    Password</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject condition="expert">
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx-setRootPassword.png" width="11.5cm" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-im1"></imagedata>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it1">
+    <primary>root</primary>
+
+    <secondary>password</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it2">
+    <primary>password</primary>
+
+    <secondary>root</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa1">This is the most
+  crucial decision point for the security of your
+  <application>GNU/Linux</application> system: you must enter the
+  <literal>root</literal> password. <literal>Root</literal> is the system
+  administrator and is the only user authorized to make updates, add users,
+  change the overall system configuration, and so on. In short,
+  <literal>root</literal> can do everything! That's why you must choose a
+  password which is difficult to guess: <application>DrakX</application> will
+  tell you if the password you chose is too simple. You're not forced to enter
+  a password, but we <emphasis>strongly</emphasis> encourage you to do so.
+  <application>GNU/Linux</application> is just as prone to operator error as
+  any other operating system. Since <literal>root</literal> can overcome all
+  limitations and unintentionally erase all data on partitions by carelessly
+  accessing the partitions themselves, it is important that it be difficult to
+  become <literal>root</literal>.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa2">The password
+  should be a mixture of alphanumeric characters and at least 8 characters
+  long. Never write down <literal>root</literal>'s password — it makes it far
+  too easy to compromise your system.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa3">One caveat: don't make the
+  password too long or too complicated because you must be able to remember
+  it!</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa4">The password
+  won't be displayed on screen as you type it. To reduce the chance of a blind
+  typing error you will need to enter the password twice. If you do happen to
+  make the same typing error twice, you will have to use this
+  <quote>incorrect</quote> password when you try to connect as
+  <literal>root</literal>, at least for the first time.</para>
+
+  <para revision="4" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa5">You can change
+  the way users are authenticated on your computer by clicking on the
+  <guibutton>Authentication method</guibutton> button. The following
+  authentication methods are available:</para>
+
+  <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa7"><guilabel>Local
+      file</guilabel>. Use a local file for all authentication and user
+      information. This is the default method.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa8"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it3">
+          <primary>LDAP</primary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it4">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>LDAP</secondary>
+        </indexterm><guilabel>LDAP</guilabel>. Use an <acronym>LDAP</acronym>
+      server for some or all authentication needs. An <acronym>LDAP</acronym>
+      directory consolidates certain types of information within your
+      organization.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa9"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it5">
+          <primary>NIS</primary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it6">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>NIS</secondary>
+        </indexterm><guilabel>NIS</guilabel>. Authenticates users against a
+      <acronym>NIS</acronym> domain. This allows you to run a group of
+      computers in the same <acronym>NIS</acronym> domain using a common
+      password and group file.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem condition="ML-Full-Manual" xml:id="drakxid-setRootPassword-SmartCard">
+      <para xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa10"><guilabel>Smart
+      Card</guilabel>. Uses <application>SmartCard</application> hardware for
+      providing authentication services.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para revision="1" xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-pa11"><indexterm revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setRootPassword-it7">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>PDC</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-drakxid-setRootPassword-it8">
+          <primary>authentication</primary>
+
+          <secondary>Active Directory</secondary>
+        </indexterm><guilabel>Windows Domain</guilabel>. Uses a
+      <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> domain
+      controller to provide authentication services through
+      <application>Active Directory</application>,
+      <application>Microsoft</application>'s implementation of
+      <acronym>LDAP</acronym>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+
+  <para revision="3" xml:id="BId-drakx-pa6">If you select a method other than
+  <guilabel>Local file</guilabel>, you will be asked to provide some
+  parameters, which vary from one method to the other. If you don't know those
+  parameters, you should ask your network administrator.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakx-pa137a">If you happen to have
+    problems remembering passwords, or if your computer will never be
+    connected to the Internet and you absolutely trust everybody who uses your
+    computer, you can choose to have <guibutton>No password</guibutton>.
+    Please bear in mind that this is an insecure option, and it is not
+    recommended.</para>
+
+    <para revision="2"></para>
+
+    <para revision="2"></para>
+  </note>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0b70b6e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupBootloaderBeginne-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="expert" xml:id="drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner" ><info><title xml:id="setupBootloaderBeginner-title">Deprecated - Installing a Bootloader</title></info>
+  
+
+  
+
+ 
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-setupBootloader.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-im1" revision="1" width="11.5cm"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it1">
+    <primary>bootloader</primary>
+    <secondary>LILO</secondary>
+  </indexterm>
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it2">
+    <primary>bootloader</primary>
+    <secondary>GRUB</secondary>
+  </indexterm> 
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it3">
+    <primary>LILO</primary> 
+  </indexterm> 
+  <indexterm xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-it4">
+    <primary>GRUB</primary>
+  </indexterm>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa1" revision="4">A
+    bootloader is a small program which is started by the computer
+    at boot time. It's responsible for starting up the whole
+    system. Normally, the bootloader installation is totally
+    automated. <application>DrakX</application> will analyze the disk boot sector and act
+    according to what it finds there:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa2" revision="1">If
+    a <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> boot sector is found, it will replace it with a
+    <application>GRUB</application>/<application>LILO</application> boot sector. This way you will be able to
+    load either <application>GNU/Linux</application> or any other <acronym>OS</acronym> installed on your
+    machine.</para>
+  </listitem>
+
+  
+  <listitem>
+   <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa3" revision="1">In
+    any other case it will ask you where it should place the boot
+    loader. Generally, the <guilabel>First sector of the drive
+    (MBR)</guilabel> is the safest place.</para>
+  </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupBootloaderBeginner-pa4" revision="1">Choosing <guilabel>Skip</guilabel> won't install a
+  bootloader. Use this option only if you know what you're
+  doing.</para>
+
+  
+
+  
+  
+  
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d2c87596
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupSCSI.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" condition="extended" version="5.0" xml:id="drakxid-setupSCSI">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-ti1">Hard Disk Detection and
+    Configuration</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa1"><application>DrakX</application> will
+  first attempt to detect any <acronym>IDE</acronym> and
+  <acronym>SATA</acronym> devices present in your computer. It will also scan
+  for one or more <acronym>PCI</acronym> <acronym>SCSI</acronym> cards. If a
+  <acronym>SCSI</acronym> card is found, <application>DrakX</application> will
+  attempt to install the correct driver.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa2">However, because
+  hardware detection is not foolproof, <application>DrakX</application> may
+  fail to detect your <acronym>SCSI</acronym> hard drives. If so, you mayl
+  need to specify your hardware.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa3">If you have had to
+  specify your <acronym>PCI</acronym> <acronym>SCSI</acronym> adapter(s),
+  <application>DrakX</application> will ask if you want to pass configuration
+  options to it. Allow <application>DrakX</application> to probe the hardware
+  to determine any card-specific options needed to initialize the
+  adapter.</para>
+
+  <para revision="2" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa4"><application>DrakX</application> will
+  usually complete this step without issues.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa5">If
+  <application>DrakX</application> cannot automatically determine the
+  parameters to be passed to the hardware, you'll need to manually configure
+  the driver.</para>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-drakxid-setupSCSI-pa6">How you determine
+  these parameters is beyond the scope of this help screen.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ed99f0a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-setupX-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+<!-- Created by Marja Van Waes -->
+
+  <section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="extended" xml:id="drakx-setupX"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-ti1">Deprecated - Configuring X, the Graphical Server</title></info>
+    
+    
+  
+    <mediaobject condition="expert" xml:id="dx-setupX">
+      <imageobject>
+	<imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-configureX.png" format="PNG" xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-im3" revision="2" width="11.5cm"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa1"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-it9"> <primary>X Window System</primary>
+    </indexterm><application>X</application> (for X Window System) is the heart of the
+    <application>GNU/Linux</application> graphical interface on which all the graphical
+    environments (<application>KDE</application>, <application>GNOME</application>,
+    <application>AfterStep</application>,
+    <application>WindowMaker</application>, etc.) bundled with
+    <application>Mageia</application> rely on.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa2">You will see a
+   list of different parameters which you can change in order to
+   optimize your graphical display.</para>
+
+  <variablelist>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_card_list">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te1">Graphic Card</term>
+
+
+
+
+
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa3">If everything
+      works fine, the installer should detect and configure the
+      video card installed on your machine. If the detection or
+      configuration is incorrect, you can choose the card installed on
+      your system from a list.</para>
+
+
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_monitor">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te2">Monitor</term>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa4">If the
+      installer fails to detect or configure your monitor properly, you
+      can choose from this list the monitor which is connected to your
+      computer.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureX_resolution">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te3">Resolution</term>
+    <listitem>
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa5">Here you can
+      choose the resolutions and color depths available for your
+      graphics hardware. Choose the one which best suits your needs
+      (you will be able to make changes after the installation). A
+      sample of the chosen configuration will be shown in the monitor
+      picture.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry>
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te4">Test</term>
+    <listitem>
+     
+     <note>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa6">Depending on your
+       hardware, this entry might not appear.</para>
+     </note>
+     
+     
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa7">The system
+      will try to open a graphical screen at the desired
+      resolution. If you see the test message during the test and
+      answer <guimenu>Yes</guimenu>, then <application>DrakX</application> will proceed to
+      the next step. If you don't see it, it means that some part of
+      the auto-detected configuration was incorrect and the test will
+      automatically end after a few seconds and return you to the
+      menu. Change settings until you get a correct graphical
+      display.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+   <varlistentry xml:id="drakxid-configureXxdm">
+    <term xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-te5">Options</term>
+    <listitem>
+     
+     <para xml:id="BId-drakx-setupX-pa8">This step
+      allows you to choose whether you want your machine to
+      automatically switch to a graphical interface at
+      boot. Obviously, you may want to select the
+      <guilabel>No</guilabel> option if your machine is to act as a
+      server, or if you were not successful in getting the display
+      configured.</para>
+    </listitem>
+   </varlistentry>
+  </variablelist>
+ </section>
+  
+  
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c7795c8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-takeOverHdChoose-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-takeOverHdChoose" userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdChoose-ti1">Deprecated - Choose drive to install Linux on</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdChoose-pa1" revision="1">Choose the
+    hard drive you want to erase in order to install your new
+    <application>Mageia</application> partition. Be careful, all data on this
+    drive will be lost and will not be recoverable!</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..edacbd10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakx-takeOverHdConfirm-sect1.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" condition="extended" xml:id="drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm"  userlevel="expert"><info><title xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-ti1" revision="1">Deprecated - Confirm data deletion</title></info>
+    
+
+    
+
+    
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on
+    <guibutton>Next<!-- The arrows aren't on the button anymore -marja -&#x0003E; --></guibutton> if you want to delete all data
+    and partitions present on this hard drive. Be careful, after
+      clicking on <guibutton>Next<!-- -&#x0003E;--></guibutton> you will not be
+    able to recover any data and partitions present on this hard
+    drive, including any <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> data.</para>
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakxid-takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on
+    <guibutton><!--&lt;- -->Previous</guibutton> to quit this operation
+    without losing data and partitions present on this hard
+    drive.</para>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/drakxservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakxservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..48d782b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/drakxservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakxservices" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">Manage system services by enabling or disabling them</title><subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata width="80%" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakxservices.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>   
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/harddrake2.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/harddrake2.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0d2c5abb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/harddrake2.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="harddrake2"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title>
+
+    <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> 
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="harddrake2.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis
+      role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> gives a general view of the hardware of your computer. When the
+  tool is launched, it executes a job to look for every element of the
+  hardware. For that, it uses the command <code>ldetect </code>which refers to
+  a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The window</title>
+
+    <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para>
+
+    <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The
+    devices are grouped by categories. Click on the &gt; to expand the content
+    of a category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para>
+
+    <para>The right column displays information about the selected device.
+    The <guimenu>Help -&gt; Fields description</guimenu> gives some information
+    about the content of the fields.</para>
+
+    <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two
+    buttons are available at the bottom of the right column:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be
+        used to parameterize the module which is used in relation to the
+        device. This must used by experts only.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which
+        can configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from
+        the MCC.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para/>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The menu</title>
+
+    <para><bridgehead>Options</bridgehead></para>
+
+    <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check
+    boxes to enable automatic detection:</para>
+
+    <para><itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+          <para>modem</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Jaz devices</para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para>Zip parallel devices</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because
+    they are slow. Check the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware
+    connected. Detection will be operational the next time this tool
+    is started.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/keyboarddrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..067362c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/keyboarddrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title>
+
+    <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC -->
+
+    <subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> helps you configure the basic layout for the keyboard that
+    you wish to use on Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on
+    the system. It can be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control
+    Center (MCC) labelled "Configure mouse and keyboard".</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Keyboard Layout</title>
+
+    <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names
+    (listed in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or
+    ethnicity each layout should be used for.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>Keyboard Type</title>
+
+    <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you
+    are unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default
+    type.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/localedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/localedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3bc4d9f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/localedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="localedrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">Manage localization for your
+    system</title>
+
+    <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="localedrake.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="localedrake-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command
+  line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root.
+  </para></footnote> can be found in the System section of the Mageia Control
+  Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for your system". It opens
+  with a window in which you can choose your language. The choice is adapted
+  to languages selected during installation.</para>
+
+  <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate compatibility with old
+  encoding (non UTF8).</para>
+
+  <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected
+  language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to
+  countries not listed.</para>
+
+  <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para>
+  
+<section xml:id="input_method">
+      <info>
+          <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Input method</title>
+      </info>
+  <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select
+  an input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input
+  methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese,
+  Korean, etc).</para>
+  <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input
+  method so users should not need to configure it manually.</para>
+  <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar
+  functions and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed
+  in another part of the Mageia Control Center. See
+  <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para>
+</section>
+
+</section>
+
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/logdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/logdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..efd004dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/logdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">View and search system logs</title>
+
+    <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found in the Mageia Control Center System tab, labelled
+  "<guilabel>View and search system logs</guilabel>".</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To do a search in the logs</title>
+
+    <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to
+    <emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field
+    <emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s)
+    to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is
+    possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of
+    the month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected
+    day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton>
+    button to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the
+    file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by
+    clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from
+      the Mageia configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools.
+      These logs are updated each time a configuration is modified.</para>
+    </note>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>To configure a mail alert</title>
+
+    <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system
+    load and the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the
+    configured address.</para>
+
+    <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail
+    Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton>
+    Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all
+    the running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want
+    to look watch. (See screenshot above).</para>
+
+    <para>The following services can be watched :</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Webmin Service</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Postfix Mail Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>FTP Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Apache World Wide Web Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>SSH Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Samba Server</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Xinetd Service</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para>
+
+        <para><mediaobject>
+            <imageobject>
+              <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/>
+            </imageobject>
+          </mediaobject></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you
+    consider unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high
+    load slows the system down and a very high load may indicate that a
+    process has gone out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend
+    setting the load value to 3 times the number of processors.</para>
+
+    <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of
+    the person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use
+    (local or on the Internet</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mageia-doc-readme.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mageia-doc-readme.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f354b4d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mageia-doc-readme.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="mageia-test-document" xml:lang="en">
+    <info>
+        <title>Mageia Test Document</title>
+    </info>
+    
+<para>Testing testing</para>
+<para>This is a <application>Mageia</application> test document. This is an absolute minimal format
+        XML document.  As you can see: It's not very complex...</para>
+    <para>I nicked the container from an old <application>Mandriva</application> XML document and
+        have been using it to play with XML rather than alter any of the main documentation
+        files.
+    
+    <note userlevel="beginner"><para>This is an interesting note with a revision tag..</para></note>    
+    
+    <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem><para>This is the first item in a list</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>This is the second item</para></listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    </para>
+    
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-boot.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c99aab3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-boot.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="mcc-boot">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">Boot</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-boot.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1"  xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure boot steps</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakboot--boot"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakboot--boot.xml"></xi:include>
+
+    <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-hardware.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2a6ce98b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-hardware.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="mcc-hardware">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">Hardware</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-hardware.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Manage your hardware</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure
+          hardware</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure graphics</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop
+          effects</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure mouse and keyboard</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Configure printing and scanning</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the
+          printer(s), the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Others</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-intro.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f343272a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-intro.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info>
+
+ 
+	<para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options to choose from in the left column. Each of these options gives a different set of tools that can be selected in the big right panel.</para>
+
+	<para>The eight following chapters are about those eight options and the related tools.</para>
+
+	<para>The titles of those pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool screens.</para>
+
+        <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on the "Search" tab in the left column.</para>
+  
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-localdisks.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b0ff4178
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-localdisks.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0">
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">Local disks</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"   fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist><title>Local disks</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem>
+  		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem>
+	          </orderedlist>
+
+ <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include>
+
+ <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-network.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-network.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f1e87241
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-network.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="en">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on
+  a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Manage your network devices</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Personalize and Secure your network</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <orderedlist>
+        <title>Others</title>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-networkservices.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..abb2781d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-networkservices.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="mcc-networkservices">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">Network Services</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-networkservices.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Network Services</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para>
+  </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+  </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include>
+
+        <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-networksharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..278b8092
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-networksharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">Network Sharing</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"   fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure Windows(R) shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure NFS shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+		  <orderedlist><title>Configure WebDAV shares</title>
+		  <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem>
+	  </orderedlist></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-security.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-security.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..94d708f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-security.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="mcc-security">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">Security</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-security.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Security</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system
+          security, permissions and audit</emphasis></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include>
+  <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> 
+  <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-sharing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ac5abf3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-sharing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="mcc-sharing">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">Sharing</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata align="center"  fileref="mcc-sharing.png"
+                 format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                 xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Sharing</title>
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include>
+
+	<xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-system.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-system.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..573efbcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mcc-system.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:id="mcc-system">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">System</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="mcc-system.png" xml:id="mcc-system-im1"  revision="1" align="center"  format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+
+  <orderedlist>
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Manage system services</title>
+        <listitem>
+		<para> <xref linkend="drakauth"></xref> </para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+          <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"></xref></para>
+        </listitem>
+
+        <listitem>
+		<para><xref linkend="drakfont"></xref></para>
+        </listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Localization</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="drakclock"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="localedrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+</listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+
+      <orderedlist><title>Administration tools</title>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="logdrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+	      <para><xref linkend="userdrake"></xref><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><xref linkend="draksnapshot-config"></xref></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+</listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"></xi:include>
+
+  <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+   <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"></xi:include> 
+
+   <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+
+   <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"></xi:include>
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mgaapplet-config.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..432f6191
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mgaapplet-config.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">Configure updates frequency</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Software management</emphasis>. It is also available
+  by a <guimenu>right click / Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon
+  <inlinemediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+
+  <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check
+  for updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check.
+  The check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is
+  out.</para>
+
+  <para/>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/mousedrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/mousedrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..288fc358
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/mousedrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">Set up the pointer device (mouse,
+    touchpad)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1"  revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" />
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by
+  typing <emphasis role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>
+  is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab
+  <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para>
+
+  <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already
+  installed by Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para>
+
+  <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your
+  mouse and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal /
+  Any PS/2 &amp; USB mice"' is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is
+  immediately taken into account.</para>
+
+  </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/msecgui.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/msecgui.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e9a8ccf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/msecgui.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="msecgui" version="5.0">
+  <info>
+	  <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title><subtitle>msecgui</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata   xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="msecgui.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+ <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think
+  you can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para>  
+
+  <para>You can start this tool from the
+	  command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as
+  root.</para>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/rpmdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2e26e95f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/rpmdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0">
+  <info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove
+    Software)</title>
+
+    <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="rpmdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags-->
+
+  <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction">
+    <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title>
+
+    <para>This tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a program for installing,
+    uninstalling and updating packages. It is the graphical user interface of
+    URPMI. At each start up, it will check online package lists (called
+    'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official servers, and will show
+    you each time the latest applications and packages available for your
+    computer. A filter system allows you to display only certain types of
+    packages: you may display only installed applications (by default), or
+    only available updates. You can also view only not installed packages. You
+    can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries of
+    descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names
+    included in the packages.</para>
+
+    <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The main parts of the screen</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <orderedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of
+        packages. The first time you start the manager, it only displays
+        applications with a graphical interface. You can display either all
+        the packages and all their dependencies and libraries or only package
+        groups such as applications only, updates only or backported packages
+        from newer versions of Mageia.</para>
+
+        <warning>
+          <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or
+          Mageia, who probably do not want command line or specialist tools.
+          Since you're reading this documentation, you're obviously interested
+          in improving your knowledge of Mageia, so it is best to set this
+          filter to "All".</para>
+        </warning>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state
+        filter:</emphasis> </firstterm></para>
+
+        <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only
+        the packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both
+        installed and not installed.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through
+        their summaries, through their complete description or through the
+        files included in the packages.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than
+        one keyword for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for
+        "mplayer" and "xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in
+        the "Find" box .</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear
+        categories and sub categories.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para>
+
+        <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete
+        description. It displays many useful elements about the selected
+        package. It can also show precise details about the package, the files
+        included in the package as well as a list of the last changes made by
+        the maintainer.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The status column</title>
+
+    <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software
+    either by category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using
+    area 4. A list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the
+    chosen medium is shown with different status markers according to whether
+    each package is installed/not installed/an update... To change this
+    status, just check or uncheck the box before the package name and click on
+    <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+
+    <para><table>
+        <title/>
+
+        <tgroup cols="2" align="left">
+          <colspec align="center"/>
+
+          <thead>
+            <row>
+              <entry align="center">Icon</entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry>
+            </row>
+          </thead>
+
+          <tbody>
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake2.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake3.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake4.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake5.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry>
+            </row>
+
+            <row>
+              <entry><mediaobject>
+                  <imageobject>
+                    <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake6.png"/>
+                  </imageobject>
+                </mediaobject></entry>
+
+              <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry>
+            </row>
+          </tbody>
+        </tgroup>
+      </table></para>
+
+    <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed),
+        the status icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be
+        uninstalled when clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status),
+        the orange with a down arrow status icon will appear and and it will
+        be installed when clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title>The dependencies</title>
+
+    <screenshot>
+      <mediaobject>
+        <imageobject>
+          <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/>
+        </imageobject>
+      </mediaobject>
+    </screenshot>
+
+    <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to
+    work. They are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake
+    displays an information window allowing you to choose whether to accept
+    the selected dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information
+    (see above). It may also happen that various packages are able to provide
+    the needed library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of
+    alternatives with a button to get more information and another button to
+    choose which package to install.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-icons.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-icons.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d9115aeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-icons.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 26 --><!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="sample-page-icons">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-ti1">Simple sample page</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <note>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa1">Paragraph with
+    <emphasis>note</emphasis> icon.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <tip>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa2">Paragraph with
+    <emphasis>tip</emphasis> icon.</para>
+  </tip>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa3">Paragraph with
+    <emphasis>warning</emphasis> icon.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para revision="1" xml:id="BId-sample-page-icons-pa4"><emphasis>If you want
+  to use other icons, make sure you import some cc-by-sa ones
+  first.</emphasis></para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aa94ce43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-itemized-list.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-ti1">Sample page with itemized list</title></info>
+
+
+   
+
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa1" revision="1">If you want to copy this list to your page, don't forget to adjust the page names and paragraph numbers in the code </para>
+  
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem>
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa2" revision="1">First item on the list</para>
+  </listitem>
+  
+   <listitem>  
+  
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa3" revision="1">Second item on the list</para>
+  </listitem>
+  
+   <listitem>  
+  
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-itemized-list-pa4" revision="1">Etc.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  
+    </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-picture.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-picture.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0a73bf7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-picture.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="sample-page-picture"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-picture-ti1">Sample page with picture</title></info>
+
+
+   
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 24 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+<!-- Same day, replaced <literal> tags with <code> tags -->
+<!-- Same day, replaced <literal> tags with <example> tags arond the code for the screenhot and around part of the text in a paragraph .-->
+
+ <!-- Same day nested <code> inside <para> -->
+ 
+   <!-- sams day, gave up on finding correct way of showing code -->
+
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-picture-pa1" revision="1">Look at the xml code of this page to see how the picture below was inserted</para>
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+  
+ <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" fileref="dx2-license.png"   format="PNG" align="center"   xml:id="acceptLicense-im1"></imagedata>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+  
+  
+  
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-sections.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-sections.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f4b50cc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-sections.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+
+
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="sample-page-sections"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-sections-ti1">Sample page with several sections</title></info>
+
+<section xml:id="first-section"><info><title xml:id="first-section-ti2" >This is the first section</title></info>  
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa2" revision="1">This section is nested in a section that covers the whole page</para>
+   
+   </section>
+
+
+
+   
+   
+   <section xml:id="second-section"><info><title xml:id="second-section-ti3" >This is the second section</title></info>  
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa2" revision="1">In html you can link to it by adding #second-section to the link to this page</para>
+   
+   </section>
+   
+   <section xml:id="third-section"><info><title xml:id="third-section-ti3" >This is the third section</title></info>  
+   
+   <para xml:id="sample-page-sections-pa3" revision="1">And this section will be shown when going to <code>/sample-page-sections#third-section</code> </para>
+   
+    </section>
+    
+    </section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-simple.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-simple.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f150dec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/sample-page-simple.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+
+
+<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 -->
+<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! -->
+
+
+
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="sample-page-simple"><info><title xml:id="sample-page-simple-ti1">Simple sample page</title></info>
+
+ <para> TEST3: Again writing a line to test whether version number is increased on saving this file </para>
+   
+
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa1" revision="1">You can use this page to make another simple page, but if you do so, don't forget to not only change the name of this file, but to change the page name in the code of this page, too </para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa2" revision="1">Everywhere where you see <code>sample-page-simple</code> in the code, you should change that into your page name</para>
+  
+  <para xml:id="sample-page-simple-pa3" revision="1">If you want to make more paragraphs, copy one and change its number in the code, for instance <code>pa3</code> to <code>pa4</code> and then change the content. It is possible to put a paragraph between existing ones by adding a letter to the number, e.g. <code>pa2a</code> </para>
+  
+
+  </section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/scannerdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ca16ae6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/scannerdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,258 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<section version="5.0" xml:id="scannerdrake"
+         xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"
+         xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink"
+         xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
+         xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"
+         xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
+         xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">Set up scanner</title>
+    <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+
+
+  <section xml:id="scannerinstallation">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">Installation</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <para>This tool <footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+      </footnote> allows you to configure a single scanner device or a
+    multifunction device which includes scanning. It also allows you to
+    share local devices connected to this computer with a remote computer
+    or to access remote scanners.</para>
+
+    <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the
+    following message:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use
+    scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE
+    packages?"</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install
+    <code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not
+    yet installed.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen
+    you see the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for
+    instance, <emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple
+    Scan</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner
+    sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para>
+
+    
+    <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and
+    checking its cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search
+    for new scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press
+    <emphasis>Add a scanner manually</emphasis>.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type
+    from the list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake2.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click
+      <emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para>
+
+      <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link
+      xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE:
+      Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link
+      xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+    </note>
+
+<figure  xml:id="choosescannerport">
+<info>
+      <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title>
+    </info>
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake3.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject></figure>
+
+    <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available
+    ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In
+    that case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only
+    one.</para>
+
+    <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a
+    screen similar to the one below.</para>
+<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake4.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="scannersharing">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title>
+    </info>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake5.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine
+    should be accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You
+    can also decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made
+    available on this machine.</para>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added
+    or deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s),
+    on this computer.</para>
+
+    <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or
+    deleted from the list of hosts which give access to a remote
+    scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake6.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake7.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all
+    remote machines.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake8.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local
+    scanner.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata align="center"  fileref="scannerdrake9.png"
+                   format="PNG" revision="1" 
+                   xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the
+    tool offers to do it.</para>
+
+    <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the
+    directive "net"</para>
+
+    <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and
+    <emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para>
+  </section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerspecifics">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title>
+    </info>  
+
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Hewlett-Packard</para>
+
+        <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device
+        Manager</emphasis> (hplip) which also manages printers. In this case,
+        this tool does not allow you to configure it and invites you to use
+        <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis>.</para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Epson</para>
+
+        <para>Drivers are available from <link
+        xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+        page</link>. When indicated, you must install the
+        <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then
+        <emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the
+        <emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a
+        conflict with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this
+        warning can be ignored.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+</section>
+
+<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps">
+    <info>
+      <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title>
+    </info>  
+
+    <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para>
+
+<itemizedlist>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded each time it is started. This tool
+    allows you to load it into the device, after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para>
+    When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at each first
+    usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para>
+      </listitem>
+
+<listitem>
+<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know what to do,
+    feel free to ask for help in the <link
+    xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para>
+</listitem>
+
+</itemizedlist>
+      
+ </section>
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/software-management.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/software-management.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ba6b652e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/software-management.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:lang="en" version="5.0"
+xml:id="software-management">
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">Software Management</title>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata  xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"  fileref="software-management.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para>
+  <orderedlist><title>Software Management</title>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+  <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</emphasis></para>
+  </listitem>
+	  <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para>
+    </listitem>
+	    <listitem>
+    <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media sources for install and update</emphasis></para>
+    </listitem>
+    </orderedlist>
+
+    <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include>
+    <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include>
+     <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include>
+
+
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/system-config-printer.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..21c5c5a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/system-config-printer.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="system-config-printer">
+  <!--  Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 -->
+
+  <!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) 
+ Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13-->
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a
+    printer</title>
+
+    <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <section xml:id="introduction">
+    <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">Introduction</title>
+
+    <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own
+    <link ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration
+    interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia
+    offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer
+    which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu
+    and openSUSE.</para>
+
+    <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the
+    installation, because some drivers may only be available in this
+    way.</para>
+
+    <para>Printer installation is carried out in the
+    <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select
+    the <guilabel>Configure printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote>
+        <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing
+        <emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be
+        asked for.</para>
+      </footnote>.</para>
+
+    <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para>
+
+    <blockquote>
+      <para>task-printing-server</para>
+
+      <para>task-printing-hp</para>
+    </blockquote>
+
+    <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB
+    of dependencies are needed.</para>
+
+    <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will
+    try to detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot
+    displays a printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected,
+    such as a printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line.
+    The window will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="automatic">
+    <title>Automatically detected printer</title>
+
+    <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds
+    the name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click
+    "Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be
+    automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known
+    drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in
+    the next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="non_automatic">
+    <title>No automatically detected printer</title>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays
+    a window to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the
+    following options.</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Select printer from database</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>provide PPD file</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>search for a driver to download</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer
+    manufacturer first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If
+    more than one driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless
+    you have encountered some problems with that one before, in this case
+    select the one which know to work.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="terminate">
+    <title>Complete the installation process</title>
+
+    <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which
+    will allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first
+    line is the name under which the device will appear in applications in the
+    list of available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test
+    page. After this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of
+    available printers.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printer">
+    <title>Network printer</title>
+
+    <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired
+    or wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are
+    attached to another workstation that serves as printserver.</para>
+
+    <note>
+      <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always
+      associate a fixed IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course
+      that should be the same as the IP address the printer of printserver is
+      set to, if it has a fixed one.</para>
+    </note>
+
+    <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or
+    printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a
+    configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a
+    label on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to
+    a Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on
+    it as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and
+    letters after "HWaddr".</para>
+
+    <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to
+    talk to your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol
+    to choose, you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> -
+    <guilabel>Find Network Printer</guilabel> option in the
+    <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu and give the IP address of the printer
+    in the box on the right, where it says "host".</para>
+
+    <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose
+    a protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the
+    list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the
+    list.</para>
+
+    <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver
+    to find which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue
+    names.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols">
+    <title>Network printing protocols</title>
+
+    <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known
+    as JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the
+    network via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the
+    printer is known on the network. This technique is also used inside some
+    ADSL-routers which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this
+    case, the IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device
+    manager" can manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like
+    <emphasis>hp:/net/&lt;name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case,
+    fixed IP-adress is not required.</para>
+
+    <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the
+    protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change
+    the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be
+    changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver
+    is the same as above.</para>
+
+    <mediaobject>
+      <imageobject>
+        <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/>
+      </imageobject>
+    </mediaobject>
+
+    <para>The other protocols are:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer
+        which can be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for
+        example a printer connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may
+        also be used also by some ADSL-routers.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the
+        same as ipp, but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol.
+        The port has to be defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same
+        as ipp, but with TLS secured protocol.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which
+        can be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example
+        a printer connected to a station using LPD.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer
+        connected to a station running Windows or a SMB server and
+        shared.</para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to
+    form the URI:</para>
+
+    <itemizedlist>
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Appsocket</para>
+
+        <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para>
+
+        <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para>
+
+        <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+
+      <listitem>
+        <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para>
+
+        <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para>
+      </listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+
+    <para>Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS
+    documentation.</link></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="properties">
+    <title>Device Properties</title>
+
+    <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access
+    to parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on
+    your system, but you can specify a different one with the
+    <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu,
+    another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific
+    parameters of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> |
+    <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section>
+    <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title>
+
+    <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by
+    inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para>
+
+    <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the
+    <guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para>
+  </section>
+
+  <section xml:id="specificities">
+    <title>Specifics</title>
+
+    <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not
+    available in Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at
+    the <link ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link>
+    site to check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if
+    the package is already present in Mageia and in this case install it
+    manually. Then, redo the installation process to configure the printer. In
+    all cases, report the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are
+    comfortable with this tool and furnish the model and driver information
+    and whether the printer works or not after installation. Here are some
+    sources to find other up-to-date drivers or for more recent
+    devices.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para><link ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This
+    page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver
+    for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para>
+
+    <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration
+    utility.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one
+    devices</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically
+    after the detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other
+    information <link ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>.
+    The tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the
+    <guilabel>System</guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link>
+    for the management of the printer.</para>
+
+    <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the
+    scanner features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface
+    doesn't allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate).
+    In this case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save
+    the picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device.
+    Afterwards, open your favourite imaging software and load your picture
+    from the memory card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link>
+    for the QPDL protocol.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this
+    search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the
+    "iscan-data" package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin
+    package can also be available and is to install. Choose the
+    <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages according to your architecture. </para>
+
+    <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about
+    a conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be
+    ignored.</para>
+
+    <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para>
+
+    <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named
+    turboprint <link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here
+    </link>.</para>
+  </section>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/transfugdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e8a9ff31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/transfugdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="en">
+  <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 -->
+
+  <!-- Tproof  -->
+
+  <!-- -->
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Import Windows(TM) documents and
+    settings</title>
+
+    <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab
+  in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents
+  and settings</guilabel></para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and
+  settings from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000,
+  <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark>
+  installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake
+    immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with
+  some explanation about the tool and import options.</para>
+
+  <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the
+  <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of
+  <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para>
+
+  <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows
+  you to choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark>
+  and Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user
+  account than yours own.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend
+    of transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> user account names with special
+    symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document
+    folders.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications
+    (especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For
+    example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using
+    <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the
+    import purposes.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press
+  <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+  to import documents:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My
+  Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My
+  Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the
+  appropriate item in this window.</para>
+
+  <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press
+  <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method
+  to import bookmarks:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and
+  <emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia
+  <emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the
+  <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+  <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE
+   <para>With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para>
+
+   <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para>
+-->
+
+  <para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton>
+  button.</para>
+
+  <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press
+  the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/uninstall-linux.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/uninstall-linux.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b45cc81e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/uninstall-linux.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 -->
+
+<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="uninstall-linux" ><info><title xml:id="BId-drakx-ti38">How to Uninstall Linux</title></info>
+  
+
+  <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa200" revision="2"><indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-it134">
+      <primary>uninstall</primary>
+    </indexterm>
+    <indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it139">
+      <primary>Mandrakelinux</primary>
+      <secondary>uninstall</secondary>
+    </indexterm> If for any reason you want to uninstall <application>Mageia</application>, you can
+    do so. The process of uninstalling <application>Mageia</application> is done in two
+    steps:</para>
+
+  
+
+  <warning>
+    <para xml:id="BId-uninstall-linux-pa206" revision="2">Removing partitions on
+    your hard drive will inevitably result in the loss of all data stored on
+    those partitions. Please make sure you've backed up all of the data you
+    want to keep <emphasis>before</emphasis> proceeding.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <orderedlist inheritnum="ignore" continuation="restarts">
+    <listitem>
+      
+
+      
+
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa202" revision="4">Delete all partitions related to
+          <application>Mageia</application> on your hard drive (usually partitions hosting
+          <acronym>ext3</acronym> file systems and the <systemitem>Swap</systemitem> partition)
+        and — optionally — replace them with a single partition using
+          <application>DiskDrake</application><phrase condition="Starter"
+          xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-ph1" revision="1"> (see <xref linkend="diskdrake"
+          />)</phrase>.</para>
+    </listitem>
+
+    <listitem>
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa203" revision="4">Remove<indexterm xml:id="BId-drakx-it135" revision="2">
+          <primary>bootloader</primary>
+
+          <secondary>uninstall</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it136" revision="1">
+          <primary>commands</primary>
+
+          <secondary>lilo</secondary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it137">
+          <primary>Master Boot Record</primary>
+        </indexterm><indexterm xml:id="BIdNEW-uninstall-linux-it138">
+          <primary>MBR</primary>
+        </indexterm> the bootloader, <application>LILO</application> in this example, from the
+      Master Boot Record (<acronym>MBR</acronym>). To do so, execute <command>lilo
+      -U</command> in a console, as <literal>root</literal>. Doing this will not only
+      uninstall <application>LILO</application> but will also restore the previous master boot
+      record, if any.</para>
+
+      <para xml:id="BId-drakx-pa204" revision="2">If you have a different boot
+      loader, please refer to its documentation to determine how to regenerate
+      the master boot record.</para>
+    </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+
+  
+</section>
diff --git a/docs/mcc-help/en/userdrake.xml b/docs/mcc-help/en/userdrake.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..269b3c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/mcc-help/en/userdrake.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:id="userdrake">
+  <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 -->
+
+  <!-- Tproof  -->
+
+  <!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30  -->
+
+  <!-- -->
+
+  <info>
+    <title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">Users and Groups</title>
+
+    <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle>
+  </info>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>This tool<footnote>
+      <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para>
+    </footnote> is found under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab
+  in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Manage users on system"</para>
+
+  <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups,
+  this means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group
+  settings (ID, shell, ...)</para>
+
+  <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are
+  listed in the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the
+  <guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para>
+
+  <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for
+  the entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write
+  anything or nothing as well!</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required
+  field.</para>
+
+  <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly
+  recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the
+  password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should
+  use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The
+  shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength
+  improves.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to
+  ensure you entered what you intended to.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that
+  allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options
+  are Bash, Dash and Sh.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>,
+  if checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new
+  user as the only member (this may be edited).</para>
+
+  <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created
+  immediately after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the
+  specific group ID.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para>
+
+  <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data
+  given for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account.
+  Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary
+  accounts.</para>
+
+  <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as
+  long as the account is locked.</para>
+
+  <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an
+  expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his
+  password periodically.</para>
+
+  <mediaobject>
+    <imageobject>
+      <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/>
+    </imageobject>
+  </mediaobject>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups
+  that the user is a member of.</para>
+
+  <note>
+    <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will
+    not be effective until his/her next login.</para>
+  </note>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the
+  group name.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the
+  users who are members of the group</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to
+  ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group
+  has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para>
+
+  <warning>
+    <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para>
+  </warning>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this
+  icon to refresh the display.</para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para>
+
+  <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is
+  intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total
+  security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to
+  make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories
+  are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default,
+  to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest
+  account</guimenu>.</para>
+</section>
\ No newline at end of file